diff options
| author | Ingo Molnar <mingo@elte.hu> | 2008-09-22 13:08:57 +0200 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Ingo Molnar <mingo@elte.hu> | 2008-09-22 13:08:57 +0200 |
| commit | 0b88641f1bafdbd087d5e63987a30cc0eadd63b9 (patch) | |
| tree | 81dcf756db373444140bb2623584710c628e3048 /Documentation | |
| parent | fbdbf709938d155c719c76b9894d28342632c797 (diff) | |
| parent | 72d31053f62c4bc464c2783974926969614a8649 (diff) | |
Merge commit 'v2.6.27-rc7' into x86/debug
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
141 files changed, 4073 insertions, 1465 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/00-INDEX b/Documentation/00-INDEX index 1977fab3865..5b5aba404aa 100644 --- a/Documentation/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/00-INDEX @@ -89,8 +89,6 @@ cciss.txt - info, major/minor #'s for Compaq's SMART Array Controllers. cdrom/ - directory with information on the CD-ROM drivers that Linux has. -cli-sti-removal.txt - - cli()/sti() removal guide. computone.txt - info on Computone Intelliport II/Plus Multiport Serial Driver. connector/ @@ -361,8 +359,6 @@ telephony/ - directory with info on telephony (e.g. voice over IP) support. time_interpolators.txt - info on time interpolators. -tipar.txt - - information about Parallel link cable for Texas Instruments handhelds. tty.txt - guide to the locking policies of the tty layer. uml/ diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..79a4a75b2d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator @@ -0,0 +1,315 @@ +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../state +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + state. This holds the regulator output state. + + This will be one of the following strings: + + 'enabled' + 'disabled' + 'unknown' + + 'enabled' means the regulator output is ON and is supplying + power to the system. + + 'disabled' means the regulator output is OFF and is not + supplying power to the system.. + + 'unknown' means software cannot determine the state. + + NOTE: this field can be used in conjunction with microvolts + and microamps to determine regulator output levels. + + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../type +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + type. This holds the regulator type. + + This will be one of the following strings: + + 'voltage' + 'current' + 'unknown' + + 'voltage' means the regulator output voltage can be controlled + by software. + + 'current' means the regulator output current limit can be + controlled by software. + + 'unknown' means software cannot control either voltage or + current limit. + + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../microvolts +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + microvolts. This holds the regulator output voltage setting + measured in microvolts (i.e. E-6 Volts). + + NOTE: This value should not be used to determine the regulator + output voltage level as this value is the same regardless of + whether the regulator is enabled or disabled. + + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../microamps +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + microamps. This holds the regulator output current limit + setting measured in microamps (i.e. E-6 Amps). + + NOTE: This value should not be used to determine the regulator + output current level as this value is the same regardless of + whether the regulator is enabled or disabled. + + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../opmode +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + opmode. This holds the regulator operating mode setting. + + The opmode value can be one of the following strings: + + 'fast' + 'normal' + 'idle' + 'standby' + 'unknown' + + The modes are described in include/linux/regulator/regulator.h + + NOTE: This value should not be used to determine the regulator + output operating mode as this value is the same regardless of + whether the regulator is enabled or disabled. + + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../min_microvolts +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + min_microvolts. This holds the minimum safe working regulator + output voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts. + + NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if + the power domain has no min microvolts constraint defined by + platform code. + + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../max_microvolts +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + max_microvolts. This holds the maximum safe working regulator + output voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts. + + NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if + the power domain has no max microvolts constraint defined by + platform code. + + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../min_microamps +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + min_microamps. This holds the minimum safe working regulator + output current limit setting for this domain measured in + microamps. + + NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if + the power domain has no min microamps constraint defined by + platform code. + + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../max_microamps +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + max_microamps. This holds the maximum safe working regulator + output current limit setting for this domain measured in + microamps. + + NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if + the power domain has no max microamps constraint defined by + platform code. + + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../num_users +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + num_users. This holds the number of consumer devices that + have called regulator_enable() on this regulator. + + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../requested_microamps +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + requested_microamps. This holds the total requested load + current in microamps for this regulator from all its consumer + devices. + + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../parent +Date: April 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Some regulator directories will contain a link called parent. + This points to the parent or supply regulator if one exists. + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_microvolts +Date: May 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + suspend_mem_microvolts. This holds the regulator output + voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts when + the system is suspended to memory. + + NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if + the power domain has no suspend to memory voltage defined by + platform code. + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_microvolts +Date: May 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + suspend_disk_microvolts. This holds the regulator output + voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts when + the system is suspended to disk. + + NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if + the power domain has no suspend to disk voltage defined by + platform code. + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_microvolts +Date: May 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + suspend_standby_microvolts. This holds the regulator output + voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts when + the system is suspended to standby. + + NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if + the power domain has no suspend to standby voltage defined by + platform code. + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_mode +Date: May 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + suspend_mem_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode + setting for this domain when the system is suspended to + memory. + + NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if + the power domain has no suspend to memory mode defined by + platform code. + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_mode +Date: May 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + suspend_disk_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode + setting for this domain when the system is suspended to disk. + + NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if + the power domain has no suspend to disk mode defined by + platform code. + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_mode +Date: May 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + suspend_standby_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode + setting for this domain when the system is suspended to + standby. + + NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if + the power domain has no suspend to standby mode defined by + platform code. + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_state +Date: May 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + suspend_mem_state. This holds the regulator operating state + when suspended to memory. + + This will be one of the following strings: + + 'enabled' + 'disabled' + 'not defined' + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_state +Date: May 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + suspend_disk_state. This holds the regulator operating state + when suspended to disk. + + This will be one of the following strings: + + 'enabled' + 'disabled' + 'not defined' + +What: /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_state +Date: May 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.26 +Contact: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Description: + Each regulator directory will contain a field called + suspend_standby_state. This holds the regulator operating + state when suspended to standby. + + This will be one of the following strings: + + 'enabled' + 'disabled' + 'not defined' diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7a16fe1e227 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +What: /sys/devices/system/memory +Date: June 2008 +Contact: Badari Pulavarty <pbadari@us.ibm.com> +Description: + The /sys/devices/system/memory contains a snapshot of the + internal state of the kernel memory blocks. Files could be + added or removed dynamically to represent hot-add/remove + operations. + +Users: hotplug memory add/remove tools + https://w3.opensource.ibm.com/projects/powerpc-utils/ + +What: /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/removable +Date: June 2008 +Contact: Badari Pulavarty <pbadari@us.ibm.com> +Description: + The file /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/removable + indicates whether this memory block is removable or not. + This is useful for a user-level agent to determine + identify removable sections of the memory before attempting + potentially expensive hot-remove memory operation + +Users: hotplug memory remove tools + https://w3.opensource.ibm.com/projects/powerpc-utils/ diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-sgi_uv b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-sgi_uv new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4573fd4b787 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-sgi_uv @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +What: /sys/firmware/sgi_uv/ +Date: August 2008 +Contact: Russ Anderson <rja@sgi.com> +Description: + The /sys/firmware/sgi_uv directory contains information + about the SGI UV platform. + + Under that directory are a number of files: + + partition_id + coherence_id + + The partition_id entry contains the partition id. + SGI UV systems can be partitioned into multiple physical + machines, which each partition running a unique copy + of the operating system. Each partition will have a unique + partition id. To display the partition id, use the command: + + cat /sys/firmware/sgi_uv/partition_id + + The coherence_id entry contains the coherence id. + A partitioned SGI UV system can have one or more coherence + domain. The coherence id indicates which coherence domain + this partition is in. To display the coherence id, use the + command: + + cat /sys/firmware/sgi_uv/coherence_id diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-gpio b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-gpio new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8aab8092ad3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-gpio @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +What: /sys/class/gpio/ +Date: July 2008 +KernelVersion: 2.6.27 +Contact: David Brownell <dbrownell@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: + + As a Kconfig option, individual GPIO signals may be accessed from + userspace. GPIOs are only made available to userspace by an explicit + "export" operation. If a given GPIO is not claimed for use by + kernel code, it may be exported by userspace (and unexported later). + Kernel code may export it for complete or partial access. + + GPIOs are identified as they are inside the kernel, using integers in + the range 0..INT_MAX. See Documentation/gpio.txt for more information. + + /sys/class/gpio + /export ... asks the kernel to export a GPIO to userspace + /unexport ... to return a GPIO to the kernel + /gpioN ... for each exported GPIO #N + /value ... always readable, writes fail for input GPIOs + /direction ... r/w as: in, out (default low); write: high, low + /gpiochipN ... for each gpiochip; #N is its first GPIO + /base ... (r/o) same as N + /label ... (r/o) descriptive, not necessarily unique + /ngpio ... (r/o) number of GPIOs; numbered N to N + (ngpio - 1) + diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..190d523ac15 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm @@ -0,0 +1,6 @@ +What: /sys/kernel/mm +Date: July 2008 +Contact: Nishanth Aravamudan <nacc@us.ibm.com>, VM maintainers +Description: + /sys/kernel/mm/ should contain any and all VM + related information in /sys/kernel/. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm-hugepages b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm-hugepages new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e21c00571cf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm-hugepages @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +What: /sys/kernel/mm/hugepages/ +Date: June 2008 +Contact: Nishanth Aravamudan <nacc@us.ibm.com>, hugetlb maintainers +Description: + /sys/kernel/mm/hugepages/ contains a number of subdirectories + of the form hugepages-<size>kB, where <size> is the page size + of the hugepages supported by the kernel/CPU combination. + + Under these directories are a number of files: + nr_hugepages + nr_overcommit_hugepages + free_hugepages + surplus_hugepages + resv_hugepages + See Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt for details. diff --git a/Documentation/CodingStyle b/Documentation/CodingStyle index 6caa1461557..1875e502f87 100644 --- a/Documentation/CodingStyle +++ b/Documentation/CodingStyle @@ -474,25 +474,29 @@ make a good program). So, you can either get rid of GNU emacs, or change it to use saner values. To do the latter, you can stick the following in your .emacs file: -(defun linux-c-mode () - "C mode with adjusted defaults for use with the Linux kernel." - (interactive) - (c-mode) - (c-set-style "K&R") - (setq tab-width 8) - (setq indent-tabs-mode t) - (setq c-basic-offset 8)) - -This will define the M-x linux-c-mode command. When hacking on a -module, if you put the string -*- linux-c -*- somewhere on the first -two lines, this mode will be automatically invoked. Also, you may want -to add - -(setq auto-mode-alist (cons '("/usr/src/linux.*/.*\\.[ch]$" . linux-c-mode) - auto-mode-alist)) - -to your .emacs file if you want to have linux-c-mode switched on -automagically when you edit source files under /usr/src/linux. +(defun c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only (ignored) + "Line up argument lists by tabs, not spaces" + (let* ((anchor (c-langelem-pos c-syntactic-element)) + (column (c-langelem-2nd-pos c-syntactic-element)) + (offset (- (1+ column) anchor)) + (steps (floor offset c-basic-offset))) + (* (max steps 1) + c-basic-offset))) + +(add-hook 'c-mode-hook + (lambda () + (let ((filename (buffer-file-name))) + ;; Enable kernel mode for the appropriate files + (when (and filename + (string-match "~/src/linux-trees" filename)) + (setq indent-tabs-mode t) + (c-set-style "linux") + (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont-nonempty + '(c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg + c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only)))))) + +This will make emacs go better with the kernel coding style for C +files below ~/src/linux-trees. But even if you fail in getting emacs to do sane formatting, not everything is lost: use "indent". diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt index 80d150458c8..d8b63d164e4 100644 --- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt +++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt @@ -298,10 +298,10 @@ recommended that you never use these unless you really know what the cache width is. int -dma_mapping_error(dma_addr_t dma_addr) +dma_mapping_error(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr) int -pci_dma_mapping_error(dma_addr_t dma_addr) +pci_dma_mapping_error(struct pci_dev *hwdev, dma_addr_t dma_addr) In some circumstances dma_map_single and dma_map_page will fail to create a mapping. A driver can check for these errors by testing the returned diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile index 0eb0d027eb3..1615350b7b5 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ DOCBOOKS := wanbook.xml z8530book.xml mcabook.xml videobook.xml \ kernel-api.xml filesystems.xml lsm.xml usb.xml kgdb.xml \ gadget.xml libata.xml mtdnand.xml librs.xml rapidio.xml \ genericirq.xml s390-drivers.xml uio-howto.xml scsi.xml \ - mac80211.xml debugobjects.xml + mac80211.xml debugobjects.xml sh.xml ### # The build process is as follows (targets): @@ -102,6 +102,13 @@ C-procfs-example = procfs_example.xml C-procfs-example2 = $(addprefix $(obj)/,$(C-procfs-example)) $(obj)/procfs-guide.xml: $(C-procfs-example2) +# List of programs to build +##oops, this is a kernel module::hostprogs-y := procfs_example +obj-m += procfs_example.o + +# Tell kbuild to always build the programs +always := $(hostprogs-y) + notfoundtemplate = echo "*** You have to install docbook-utils or xmlto ***"; \ exit 1 db2xtemplate = db2TYPE -o $(dir $@) $< diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl index 2510763295d..084f6ad7b7a 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl @@ -219,10 +219,10 @@ </para> <sect1 id="lock-intro"> - <title>Three Main Types of Kernel Locks: Spinlocks, Mutexes and Semaphores</title> + <title>Two Main Types of Kernel Locks: Spinlocks and Mutexes</title> <para> - There are three main types of kernel locks. The fundamental type + There are two main types of kernel locks. The fundamental type is the spinlock (<filename class="headerfile">include/asm/spinlock.h</filename>), which is a very simple single-holder lock: if you can't get the @@ -240,14 +240,6 @@ use a spinlock instead. </para> <para> - The third type is a semaphore - (<filename class="headerfile">include/linux/semaphore.h</filename>): it - can have more than one holder at any time (the number decided at - initialization time), although it is most commonly used as a - single-holder lock (a mutex). If you can't get a semaphore, your - task will be suspended and later on woken up - just like for mutexes. - </para> - <para> Neither type of lock is recursive: see <xref linkend="deadlock"/>. </para> @@ -278,7 +270,7 @@ </para> <para> - Semaphores still exist, because they are required for + Mutexes still exist, because they are required for synchronization between <firstterm linkend="gloss-usercontext">user contexts</firstterm>, as we will see below. </para> @@ -289,18 +281,17 @@ <para> If you have a data structure which is only ever accessed from - user context, then you can use a simple semaphore - (<filename>linux/linux/semaphore.h</filename>) to protect it. This - is the most trivial case: you initialize the semaphore to the number - of resources available (usually 1), and call - <function>down_interruptible()</function> to grab the semaphore, and - <function>up()</function> to release it. There is also a - <function>down()</function>, which should be avoided, because it + user context, then you can use a simple mutex + (<filename>include/linux/mutex.h</filename>) to protect it. This + is the most trivial case: you initialize the mutex. Then you can + call <function>mutex_lock_interruptible()</function> to grab the mutex, + and <function>mutex_unlock()</function> to release it. There is also a + <function>mutex_lock()</function>, which should be avoided, because it will not return if a signal is received. </para> <para> - Example: <filename>linux/net/core/netfilter.c</filename> allows + Example: <filename>net/netfilter/nf_sockopt.c</filename> allows registration of new <function>setsockopt()</function> and <function>getsockopt()</function> calls, with <function>nf_register_sockopt()</function>. Registration and @@ -515,7 +506,7 @@ <listitem> <para> If you are in a process context (any syscall) and want to - lock other process out, use a semaphore. You can take a semaphore + lock other process out, use a mutex. You can take a mutex and sleep (<function>copy_from_user*(</function> or <function>kmalloc(x,GFP_KERNEL)</function>). </para> @@ -662,7 +653,7 @@ <entry>SLBH</entry> <entry>SLBH</entry> <entry>SLBH</entry> -<entry>DI</entry> +<entry>MLI</entry> <entry>None</entry> </row> @@ -692,8 +683,8 @@ <entry>spin_lock_bh</entry> </row> <row> -<entry>DI</entry> -<entry>down_interruptible</entry> +<entry>MLI</entry> +<entry>mutex_lock_interruptible</entry> </row> </tbody> @@ -1310,7 +1301,7 @@ as Alan Cox says, <quote>Lock data, not code</quote>. <para> There is a coding bug where a piece of code tries to grab a spinlock twice: it will spin forever, waiting for the lock to - be released (spinlocks, rwlocks and semaphores are not + be released (spinlocks, rwlocks and mutexes are not recursive in Linux). This is trivial to diagnose: not a stay-up-five-nights-talk-to-fluffy-code-bunnies kind of problem. @@ -1335,7 +1326,7 @@ as Alan Cox says, <quote>Lock data, not code</quote>. <para> This complete lockup is easy to diagnose: on SMP boxes the - watchdog timer or compiling with <symbol>DEBUG_SPINLOCKS</symbol> set + watchdog timer or compiling with <symbol>DEBUG_SPINLOCK</symbol> set (<filename>include/linux/spinlock.h</filename>) will show this up immediately when it happens. </para> @@ -1558,7 +1549,7 @@ the amount of locking which needs to be done. <title>Read/Write Lock Variants</title> <para> - Both spinlocks and semaphores have read/write variants: + Both spinlocks and mutexes have read/write variants: <type>rwlock_t</type> and <structname>struct rw_semaphore</structname>. These divide users into two classes: the readers and the writers. If you are only reading the data, you can get a read lock, but to write to @@ -1681,7 +1672,7 @@ the amount of locking which needs to be done. #include <linux/slab.h> #include <linux/string.h> +#include <linux/rcupdate.h> - #include <linux/semaphore.h> + #include <linux/mutex.h> #include <asm/errno.h> struct object @@ -1913,7 +1904,7 @@ machines due to caching. </listitem> <listitem> <para> - <function> put_user()</function> + <function>put_user()</function> </para> </listitem> </itemizedlist> @@ -1927,13 +1918,13 @@ machines due to caching. <listitem> <para> - <function>down_interruptible()</function> and - <function>down()</function> + <function>mutex_lock_interruptible()</function> and + <function>mutex_lock()</function> </para> <para> - There is a <function>down_trylock()</function> which can be + There is a <function>mutex_trylock()</function> which can be used inside interrupt context, as it will not sleep. - <function>up()</function> will also never sleep. + <function>mutex_unlock()</function> will also never sleep. </para> </listitem> </itemizedlist> @@ -2023,7 +2014,7 @@ machines due to caching. <para> Prior to 2.5, or when <symbol>CONFIG_PREEMPT</symbol> is unset, processes in user context inside the kernel would not - preempt each other (ie. you had that CPU until you have it up, + preempt each other (ie. you had that CPU until you gave it up, except for interrupts). With the addition of <symbol>CONFIG_PREEMPT</symbol> in 2.5.4, this changed: when in user context, higher priority tasks can "cut in": spinlocks diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl index e8acd1f0345..372dec20c8d 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl @@ -98,6 +98,24 @@ "Kernel debugging" select "KGDB: kernel debugging with remote gdb". </para> <para> + It is advised, but not required that you turn on the + CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER kernel option. This option inserts code to + into the compiled executable which saves the frame information in + registers or on the stack at different points which will allow a + debugger such as gdb to more accurately construct stack back traces + while debugging the kernel. + </para> + <para> + If the architecture that you are using supports the kernel option + CONFIG_DEBUG_RODATA, you should consider turning it off. This + option will prevent the use of software breakpoints because it + marks certain regions of the kernel's memory space as read-only. + If kgdb supports it for the architecture you are using, you can + use hardware breakpoints if you desire to run with the + CONFIG_DEBUG_RODATA option turned on, else you need to turn off + this option. + </para> + <para> Next you should choose one of more I/O drivers to interconnect debugging host and debugged target. Early boot debugging requires a KGDB I/O driver that supports early debugging and the driver must be diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl index 1fd6a1ec759..8a5dc6e021f 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl @@ -29,12 +29,12 @@ <revhistory> <revision> - <revnumber>1.0 </revnumber> + <revnumber>1.0</revnumber> <date>May 30, 2001</date> <revremark>Initial revision posted to linux-kernel</revremark> </revision> <revision> - <revnumber>1.1 </revnumber> + <revnumber>1.1</revnumber> <date>June 3, 2001</date> <revremark>Revised after comments from linux-kernel</revremark> </revision> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c b/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c index 7064084c1c5..2f3de0fb836 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/procfs_example.c @@ -189,8 +189,6 @@ static int __init init_procfs_example(void) return 0; no_symlink: - remove_proc_entry("tty", example_dir); -no_tty: remove_proc_entry("bar", example_dir); no_bar: remove_proc_entry("foo", example_dir); @@ -206,7 +204,6 @@ out: static void __exit cleanup_procfs_example(void) { remove_proc_entry("jiffies_too", example_dir); - remove_proc_entry("tty", example_dir); remove_proc_entry("bar", example_dir); remove_proc_entry("foo", example_dir); remove_proc_entry("jiffies", example_dir); @@ -222,3 +219,4 @@ module_exit(cleanup_procfs_example); MODULE_AUTHOR("Erik Mouw"); MODULE_DESCRIPTION("procfs examples"); +MODULE_LICENSE("GPL"); diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/s390-drivers.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/s390-drivers.tmpl index 4acc73240a6..95bfc12e543 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/s390-drivers.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/s390-drivers.tmpl @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ the hardware structures represented here, please consult the Principles of Operation. </para> -!Iinclude/asm-s390/cio.h +!Iarch/s390/include/asm/cio.h </sect1> <sect1 id="ccwdev"> <title>ccw devices</title> @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ ccw device structure. Device drivers must not bypass those functions or strange side effects may happen. </para> -!Iinclude/asm-s390/ccwdev.h +!Iarch/s390/include/asm/ccwdev.h !Edrivers/s390/cio/device.c !Edrivers/s390/cio/device_ops.c </sect1> @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ measurement data which is made available by the channel subsystem for each channel attached device. </para> -!Iinclude/asm-s390/cmb.h +!Iarch/s390/include/asm/cmb.h !Edrivers/s390/cio/cmf.c </sect1> </chapter> @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ </para> <sect1 id="ccwgroupdevices"> <title>ccw group devices</title> -!Iinclude/asm-s390/ccwgroup.h +!Iarch/s390/include/asm/ccwgroup.h !Edrivers/s390/cio/ccwgroup.c </sect1> </chapter> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/sh.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/sh.tmpl new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0c3dc4c69dd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/sh.tmpl @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN" + "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []> + +<book id="sh-drivers"> + <bookinfo> + <title>SuperH Interfaces Guide</title> + + <authorgroup> + <author> + <firstname>Paul</firstname> + <surname>Mundt</surname> + <affiliation> + <address> + <email>lethal@linux-sh.org</email> + </address> + </affiliation> + </author> + </authorgroup> + + <copyright> + <year>2008</year> + <holder>Paul Mundt</holder> + </copyright> + <copyright> + <year>2008</year> + <holder>Renesas Technology Corp.</holder> + </copyright> + + <legalnotice> + <para> + This documentation is free software; you can redistribute + it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public + License version 2 as published by the Free Software Foundation. + </para> + + <para> + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be + useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied + warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + See the GNU General Public License for more details. + </para> + + <para> + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public + License along with this program; if not, write to the Free + Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, + MA 02111-1307 USA + </para> + + <para> + For more details see the file COPYING in the source + distribution of Linux. + </para> + </legalnotice> + </bookinfo> + +<toc></toc> + + <chapter id="mm"> + <title>Memory Management</title> + <sect1 id="sh4"> + <title>SH-4</title> + <sect2 id="sq"> + <title>Store Queue API</title> +!Earch/sh/kernel/cpu/sh4/sq.c + </sect2> + </sect1> + <sect1 id="sh5"> + <title>SH-5</title> + <sect2 id="tlb"> + <title>TLB Interfaces</title> +!Iarch/sh/mm/tlb-sh5.c +!Iarch/sh/include/asm/tlb_64.h + </sect2> + </sect1> + </chapter> + <chapter id="clk"> + <title>Clock Framework Extensions</title> +!Iarch/sh/include/asm/clock.h + </chapter> + <chapter id="mach"> + <title>Machine Specific Interfaces</title> + <sect1 id="dreamcast"> + <title>mach-dreamcast</title> +!Iarch/sh/boards/mach-dreamcast/rtc.c + </sect1> + <sect1 id="x3proto"> + <title>mach-x3proto</title> +!Earch/sh/boards/mach-x3proto/ilsel.c + </sect1> + </chapter> + <chapter id="busses"> + <title>Busses</title> + <sect1 id="superhyway"> + <title>SuperHyway</title> +!Edrivers/sh/superhyway/superhyway.c + </sect1> + + <sect1 id="maple"> + <title>Maple</title> +!Edrivers/sh/maple/maple.c + </sect1> + </chapter> +</book> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl index 89817795e66..0bc25949b66 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/videobook.tmpl @@ -1648,7 +1648,7 @@ static struct video_buffer capture_fb; <chapter id="pubfunctions"> <title>Public Functions Provided</title> -!Edrivers/media/video/videodev.c +!Edrivers/media/video/v4l2-dev.c </chapter> </book> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/z8530book.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/z8530book.tmpl index 42c75ba71ba..a42a8a4c768 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/z8530book.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/z8530book.tmpl @@ -69,12 +69,6 @@ device to be used as both a tty interface and as a synchronous controller is a project for Linux post the 2.4 release </para> - <para> - The support code handles most common card configurations and - supports running both Cisco HDLC and Synchronous PPP. With extra - glue the frame relay and X.25 protocols can also be used with this - driver. - </para> </chapter> <chapter id="Driver_Modes"> @@ -179,35 +173,27 @@ <para> If you wish to use the network interface facilities of the driver, then you need to attach a network device to each channel that is - present and in use. In addition to use the SyncPPP and Cisco HDLC + present and in use. In addition to use the generic HDLC you need to follow some additional plumbing rules. They may seem complex but a look at the example hostess_sv11 driver should reassure you. </para> <para> The network device used for each channel should be pointed to by - the netdevice field of each channel. The dev-> priv field of the + the netdevice field of each channel. The hdlc-> priv field of the network device points to your private data - you will need to be - able to find your ppp device from this. In addition to use the - sync ppp layer the private data must start with a void * pointer - to the syncppp structures. + able to find your private data from this. </para> <para> The way most drivers approach this particular problem is to create a structure holding the Z8530 device definition and - put that and the syncppp pointer into the private field of - the network device. The network device fields of the channels - then point back to the network devices. The ppp_device can also - be put in the private structure conveniently. + put that into the private field of the network device. The + network device fields of the channels then point back to the + network devices. </para> <para> - If you wish to use the synchronous ppp then you need to attach - the syncppp layer to the network device. You should do this before - you register the network device. The - <function>sppp_attach</function> requires that the first void * - pointer in your private data is pointing to an empty struct - ppp_device. The function fills in the initial data for the - ppp/hdlc layer. + If you wish to use the generic HDLC then you need to register + the HDLC device. </para> <para> Before you register your network device you will also need to @@ -314,10 +300,10 @@ buffer in sk_buff format and queues it for transmission. The caller must provide the entire packet with the exception of the bitstuffing and CRC. This is normally done by the caller via - the syncppp interface layer. It returns 0 if the buffer has been - queued and non zero values for queue full. If the function accepts - the buffer it becomes property of the Z8530 layer and the caller - should not free it. + the generic HDLC interface layer. It returns 0 if the buffer has been + queued and non zero values for queue full. If the function accepts + the buffer it becomes property of the Z8530 layer and the caller + should not free it. </para> <para> The function <function>z8530_get_stats</function> returns a pointer diff --git a/Documentation/Intel-IOMMU.txt b/Documentation/Intel-IOMMU.txt index c2321903aa0..21bc416d887 100644 --- a/Documentation/Intel-IOMMU.txt +++ b/Documentation/Intel-IOMMU.txt @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ IOVA generation is pretty generic. We used the same technique as vmalloc() but these are not global address spaces, but separate for each domain. Different DMA engines may support different number of domains. -We also allocate gaurd pages with each mapping, so we can attempt to catch +We also allocate guard pages with each mapping, so we can attempt to catch any overflow that might happen. @@ -112,4 +112,4 @@ TBD - For compatibility testing, could use unity map domain for all devices, just provide a 1-1 for all useful memory under a single domain for all devices. -- API for paravirt ops for abstracting functionlity for VMM folks. +- API for paravirt ops for abstracting functionality for VMM folks. diff --git a/Documentation/Makefile b/Documentation/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..94b94573353 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +obj-m := DocBook/ accounting/ auxdisplay/ connector/ \ + filesystems/configfs/ ia64/ networking/ \ + pcmcia/ spi/ video4linux/ vm/ watchdog/src/ diff --git a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches index 118ca6e9404..f79ad9ff603 100644 --- a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches +++ b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches @@ -528,7 +528,33 @@ See more details on the proper patch format in the following references. +16) Sending "git pull" requests (from Linus emails) +Please write the git repo address and branch name alone on the same line +so that I can't even by mistake pull from the wrong branch, and so +that a triple-click just selects the whole thing. + +So the proper format is something along the lines of: + + "Please pull from + + git://jdelvare.pck.nerim.net/jdelvare-2.6 i2c-for-linus + + to get these changes:" + +so that I don't have to hunt-and-peck for the address and inevitably +get it wrong (actually, I've only gotten it wrong a few times, and +checking against the diffstat tells me when I get it wrong, but I'm +just a lot more comfortable when I don't have to "look for" the right +thing to pull, and double-check that I have the right branch-name). + + +Please use "git diff -M --stat --summary" to generate the diffstat: +the -M enables rename detection, and the summary enables a summary of +new/deleted or renamed files. + +With rename detection, the statistics are rather different [...] +because git will notice that a fair number of the changes are renames. ----------------------------------- SECTION 2 - HINTS, TIPS, AND TRICKS diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/Makefile b/Documentation/accounting/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..31929eb875b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/accounting/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built. +obj- := dummy.o + +# List of programs to build +hostprogs-y := getdelays + +# Tell kbuild to always build the programs +always := $(hostprogs-y) + +HOSTCFLAGS_getdelays.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/delay-accounting.txt b/Documentation/accounting/delay-accounting.txt index 1443cd71d26..8a12f0730c9 100644 --- a/Documentation/accounting/delay-accounting.txt +++ b/Documentation/accounting/delay-accounting.txt @@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ the delays experienced by a task while a) waiting for a CPU (while being runnable) b) completion of synchronous block I/O initiated by the task c) swapping in pages +d) memory reclaim and makes these statistics available to userspace through the taskstats interface. @@ -41,7 +42,7 @@ this structure. See include/linux/taskstats.h for a description of the fields pertaining to delay accounting. It will generally be in the form of counters returning the cumulative -delay seen for cpu, sync block I/O, swapin etc. +delay seen for cpu, sync block I/O, swapin, memory reclaim etc. Taking the difference of two successive readings of a given counter (say cpu_delay_total) for a task will give the delay @@ -94,7 +95,9 @@ CPU count real total virtual total delay total 7876 92005750 100000000 24001500 IO count delay total 0 0 -MEM count delay total +SWAP count delay total + 0 0 +RECLAIM count delay total 0 0 Get delays seen in executing a given simple command @@ -108,5 +111,7 @@ CPU count real total virtual total delay total 6 4000250 4000000 0 IO count delay total 0 0 -MEM count delay total +SWAP count delay total + 0 0 +RECLAIM count delay total 0 0 diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c index 40121b5cca1..cc49400b4af 100644 --- a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c +++ b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c @@ -196,14 +196,24 @@ void print_delayacct(struct taskstats *t) " %15llu%15llu%15llu%15llu\n" "IO %15s%15s\n" " %15llu%15llu\n" - "MEM %15s%15s\n" + "SWAP %15s%15s\n" + " %15llu%15llu\n" + "RECLAIM %12s%15s\n" " %15llu%15llu\n", "count", "real total", "virtual total", "delay total", - t->cpu_count, t->cpu_run_real_total, t->cpu_run_virtual_total, - t->cpu_delay_total, + (unsigned long long)t->cpu_count, + (unsigned long long)t->cpu_run_real_total, + (unsigned long long)t->cpu_run_virtual_total, + (unsigned long long)t->cpu_delay_total, + "count", "delay total", + (unsigned long long)t->blkio_count, + (unsigned long long)t->blkio_delay_total, + "count", "delay total", + (unsigned long long)t->swapin_count, + (unsigned long long)t->swapin_delay_total, "count", "delay total", - t->blkio_count, t->blkio_delay_total, - "count", "delay total", t->swapin_count, t->swapin_delay_total); + (unsigned long long)t->freepages_count, + (unsigned long long)t->freepages_delay_total); } void task_context_switch_counts(struct taskstats *t) @@ -211,14 +221,17 @@ void task_context_switch_counts(struct taskstats *t) printf("\n\nTask %15s%15s\n" " %15llu%15llu\n", "voluntary", "nonvoluntary", - t->nvcsw, t->nivcsw); + (unsigned long long)t->nvcsw, (unsigned long long)t->nivcsw); } void print_cgroupstats(struct cgroupstats *c) { printf("sleeping %llu, blocked %llu, running %llu, stopped %llu, " - "uninterruptible %llu\n", c->nr_sleeping, c->nr_io_wait, - c->nr_running, c->nr_stopped, c->nr_uninterruptible); + "uninterruptible %llu\n", (unsigned long long)c->nr_sleeping, + (unsigned long long)c->nr_io_wait, + (unsigned long long)c->nr_running, + (unsigned long long)c->nr_stopped, + (unsigned long long)c->nr_uninterruptible); } diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.txt b/Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.txt index cd784f46bf8..e7512c061c1 100644 --- a/Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.txt +++ b/Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.txt @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ This document contains an explanation of the struct taskstats fields. There are three different groups of fields in the struct taskstats: 1) Common and basic accounting fields - If CONFIG_TASKSTATS is set, the taskstats inteface is enabled and + If CONFIG_TASKSTATS is set, the taskstats interface is enabled and the common fields and basic accounting fields are collected for delivery at do_exit() of a task. 2) Delay accounting fields @@ -26,6 +26,8 @@ There are three different groups of fields in the struct taskstats: 5) Time accounting for SMT machines +6) Extended delay accounting fields for memory reclaim + Future extension should add fields to the end of the taskstats struct, and should not change the relative position of each field within the struct. @@ -170,4 +172,9 @@ struct taskstats { __u64 ac_utimescaled; /* utime scaled on frequency etc */ __u64 ac_stimescaled; /* stime scaled on frequency etc */ __u64 cpu_scaled_run_real_total; /* scaled cpu_run_real_total */ + +6) Extended delay accounting fields for memory reclaim + /* Delay waiting for memory reclaim */ + __u64 freepages_count; + __u64 freepages_delay_total; } diff --git a/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx b/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx index 43edb4ecf27..72fbcc4fcab 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx +++ b/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ Linux currently supports the following features on the IXP4xx chips: - Flash access (MTD/JFFS) - I2C through GPIO on IXP42x - GPIO for input/output/interrupts - See include/asm-arm/arch-ixp4xx/platform.h for access functions. + See arch/arm/mach-ixp4xx/include/mach/platform.h for access functions. - Timers (watchdog, OS) The following components of the chips are not supported by Linux and diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Interrupts b/Documentation/arm/Interrupts index 0d3dbf1099b..f09ab1b90ef 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/Interrupts +++ b/Documentation/arm/Interrupts @@ -138,14 +138,8 @@ So, what's changed? Set active the IRQ edge(s)/level. This replaces the SA1111 INTPOL manipulation, and the set_GPIO_IRQ_edge() - function. Type should be one of the following: - - #define IRQT_NOEDGE (0) - #define IRQT_RISING (__IRQT_RISEDGE) - #define IRQT_FALLING (__IRQT_FALEDGE) - #define IRQT_BOTHEDGE (__IRQT_RISEDGE|__IRQT_FALEDGE) - #define IRQT_LOW (__IRQT_LOWLVL) - #define IRQT_HIGH (__IRQT_HIGHLVL) + function. Type should be one of IRQ_TYPE_xxx defined in + <linux/irq.h> 3. set_GPIO_IRQ_edge() is obsolete, and should be replaced by set_irq_type. @@ -164,7 +158,7 @@ So, what's changed? be re-checked for pending events. (see the Neponset IRQ handler for details). -7. fixup_irq() is gone, as is include/asm-arm/arch-*/irq.h +7. fixup_irq() is gone, as is arch/arm/mach-*/include/mach/irq.h Please note that this will not solve all problems - some of them are hardware based. Mixing level-based and edge-based IRQs on the same diff --git a/Documentation/arm/README b/Documentation/arm/README index 9b9c8226fdc..d98783fbe0c 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/README +++ b/Documentation/arm/README @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Machine/Platform support To this end, we now have arch/arm/mach-$(MACHINE) directories which are designed to house the non-driver files for a particular machine (eg, PCI, memory management, architecture definitions etc). For all future - machines, there should be a corresponding include/asm-arm/arch-$(MACHINE) + machines, there should be a corresponding arch/arm/mach-$(MACHINE)/include/mach directory. @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Kernel entry (head.S) class typically based around one or more system on a chip devices, and acts as a natural container around the actual implementations. These classes are given directories - arch/arm/mach-<class> and - include/asm-arm/arch-<class> - which contain the source files to + arch/arm/mach-<class> - which contain the source files to/include/mach support the machine class. This directories also contain any machine specific supporting code. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt index 8caea8c237e..ea7ccfc4b27 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt @@ -13,16 +13,31 @@ Introduction data-sheet/users manual to find out the complete list. +GPIOLIB +------- + + With the event of the GPIOLIB in drivers/gpio, support for some + of the GPIO functions such as reading and writing a pin will + be removed in favour of this common access method. + + Once all the extant drivers have been converted, the functions + listed below will be removed (they may be marked as __deprecated + in the near future). + + - s3c2410_gpio_getpin + - s3c2410_gpio_setpin + + Headers ------- - See include/asm-arm/arch-s3c2410/regs-gpio.h for the list + See arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/include/mach/regs-gpio.h for the list of GPIO pins, and the configuration values for them. This - is included by using #include <asm/arch/regs-gpio.h> + is included by using #include <mach/regs-gpio.h> The GPIO management functions are defined in the hardware - header include/asm-arm/arch-s3c2410/hardware.h which can be - included by #include <asm/arch/hardware.h> + header arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/include/mach/hardware.h which can be + included by #include <mach/hardware.h> A useful amount of documentation can be found in the hardware header on how the GPIO functions (and others) work. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt index d04e1e30c47..cff6227b448 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt @@ -8,9 +8,10 @@ Introduction The Samsung S3C24XX range of ARM9 System-on-Chip CPUs are supported by the 's3c2410' architecture of ARM Linux. Currently the S3C2410, - S3C2412, S3C2413, S3C2440 and S3C2442 devices are supported. + S3C2412, S3C2413, S3C2440, S3C2442 and S3C2443 devices are supported. + + Support for the S3C2400 and S3C24A0 series are in progress. - Support for the S3C2400 series is in progress. Configuration ------------- @@ -36,7 +37,23 @@ Layout in arch/arm/mach-s3c2410 and S3C2440 in arch/arm/mach-s3c2440 Register, kernel and platform data definitions are held in the - include/asm-arm/arch-s3c2410 directory. + arch/arm/mach-s3c2410 directory./include/mach + +arch/arm/plat-s3c24xx: + + Files in here are either common to all the s3c24xx family, + or are common to only some of them with names to indicate this + status. The files that are not common to all are generally named + with the initial cpu they support in the series to ensure a short + name without any possibility of confusion with newer devices. + + As an example, initially s3c244x would cover s3c2440 and s3c2442, but + with the s3c2443 which does not share many of the same drivers in + this directory, the name becomes invalid. We stick to s3c2440-<x> + to indicate a driver that is s3c2440 and s3c2442 compatible. + + This does mean that to find the status of any given SoC, a number + of directories may need to be searched. Machines @@ -159,6 +176,17 @@ NAND For more information see Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/NAND.txt +SD/MMC +------ + + The SD/MMC hardware pre S3C2443 is supported in the current + kernel, the driver is drivers/mmc/host/s3cmci.c and supports + 1 and 4 bit SD or MMC cards. + + The SDIO behaviour of this driver has not been fully tested. There is no + current support for hardware SDIO interrupts. + + Serial ------ @@ -178,6 +206,9 @@ GPIO The core contains support for manipulating the GPIO, see the documentation in GPIO.txt in the same directory as this file. + Newer kernels carry GPIOLIB, and support is being moved towards + this with some of the older support in line to be removed. + Clock Management ---------------- diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt index b93b68e2b14..67671eba423 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ Board Support Platform Data ------------- - See linux/include/asm-arm/arch-s3c2410/usb-control.h for the + See arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/include/mach/usb-control.h for the descriptions of the platform device data. An implementation can be found in linux/arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/usb-simtec.c . diff --git a/Documentation/auxdisplay/Makefile b/Documentation/auxdisplay/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..51fe23332c8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/auxdisplay/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built. +obj- := dummy.o + +# List of programs to build +hostprogs-y := cfag12864b-example + +# Tell kbuild to always build the programs +always := $(hostprogs-y) + +HOSTCFLAGS_cfag12864b-example.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include diff --git a/Documentation/bt8xxgpio.txt b/Documentation/bt8xxgpio.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d8297e4ebd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/bt8xxgpio.txt @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ +=============================================================== +== BT8XXGPIO driver == +== == +== A driver for a selfmade cheap BT8xx based PCI GPIO-card == +== == +== For advanced documentation, see == +== http://www.bu3sch.de/btgpio.php == +=============================================================== + + +A generic digital 24-port PCI GPIO card can be built out of an ordinary +Brooktree bt848, bt849, bt878 or bt879 based analog TV tuner card. The +Brooktree chip is used in old analog Hauppauge WinTV PCI cards. You can easily +find them used for low prices on the net. + +The bt8xx chip does have 24 digital GPIO ports. +These ports are accessible via 24 pins on the SMD chip package. + + +============================================== +== How to physically access the GPIO pins == +============================================== + +The are several ways to access these pins. One might unsolder the whole chip +and put it on a custom PCI board, or one might only unsolder each individual +GPIO pin and solder that to some tiny wire. As the chip package really is tiny +there are some advanced soldering skills needed in any case. + +The physical pinouts are drawn in the following ASCII art. +The GPIO pins are marked with G00-G23 + + G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 + 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 + | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | + --------------------------------------------------------------------------- + --| ^ ^ |-- + --| pin 86 pin 67 |-- + --| |-- + --| pin 61 > |-- G18 + --| |-- G19 + --| |-- G20 + --| |-- G21 + --| |-- G22 + --| pin 56 > |-- G23 + --| |-- + --| Brooktree 878/879 |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| O |-- + --| |-- + --------------------------------------------------------------------------- + | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | + ^ + This is pin 1 + diff --git a/Documentation/cciss.txt b/Documentation/cciss.txt index 63e59b8847c..8244c6442fa 100644 --- a/Documentation/cciss.txt +++ b/Documentation/cciss.txt @@ -112,27 +112,18 @@ Hot plug support for SCSI tape drives Hot plugging of SCSI tape drives is supported, with some caveats. The cciss driver must be informed that changes to the SCSI bus -have been made, in addition to and prior to informing the SCSI -mid layer. This may be done via the /proc filesystem. For example: +have been made. This may be done via the /proc filesystem. +For example: echo "rescan" > /proc/scsi/cciss0/1 -This causes the adapter to query the adapter about changes to the -physical SCSI buses and/or fibre channel arbitrated loop and the +This causes the driver to query the adapter about changes to the +physical SCSI buses and/or fibre channel arbitrated loop and the driver to make note of any new or removed sequential access devices or medium changers. The driver will output messages indicating what devices have been added or removed and the controller, bus, target and -lun used to address the device. Once this is done, the SCSI mid layer -can be informed of changes to the virtual SCSI bus which the driver -presents to it in the usual way. For example: - - echo scsi add-single-device 3 2 1 0 > /proc/scsi/scsi - -to add a device on controller 3, bus 2, target 1, lun 0. Note that -the driver makes an effort to preserve the devices positions -in the virtual SCSI bus, so if you are only moving tape drives -around on the same adapter and not adding or removing tape drives -from the adapter, informing the SCSI mid layer may not be necessary. +lun used to address the device. It then notifies the SCSI mid layer +of these changes. Note that the naming convention of the /proc filesystem entries contains a number in addition to the driver name. (E.g. "cciss0" diff --git a/Documentation/cli-sti-removal.txt b/Documentation/cli-sti-removal.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 60932b02fcb..00000000000 --- a/Documentation/cli-sti-removal.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,133 +0,0 @@ - -#### cli()/sti() removal guide, started by Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com> - - -as of 2.5.28, five popular macros have been removed on SMP, and -are being phased out on UP: - - cli(), sti(), save_flags(flags), save_flags_cli(flags), restore_flags(flags) - -until now it was possible to protect driver code against interrupt -handlers via a cli(), but from now on other, more lightweight methods -have to be used for synchronization, such as spinlocks or semaphores. - -for example, driver code that used to do something like: - - struct driver_data; - - irq_handler (...) - { - .... - driver_data.finish = 1; - driver_data.new_work = 0; - .... - } - - ... - - ioctl_func (...) - { - ... - cli(); - ... - driver_data.finish = 0; - driver_data.new_work = 2; - ... - sti(); - ... - } - -was SMP-correct because the cli() function ensured that no -interrupt handler (amongst them the above irq_handler()) function -would execute while the cli()-ed section is executing. - -but from now on a more direct method of locking has to be used: - - DEFINE_SPINLOCK(driver_lock); - struct driver_data; - - irq_handler (...) - { - unsigned long flags; - .... - spin_lock_irqsave(&driver_lock, flags); - .... - driver_data.finish = 1; - driver_data.new_work = 0; - .... - spin_unlock_irqrestore(&driver_lock, flags); - .... - } - - ... - - ioctl_func (...) - { - ... - spin_lock_irq(&driver_lock); - ... - driver_data.finish = 0; - driver_data.new_work = 2; - ... - spin_unlock_irq(&driver_lock); - ... - } - -the above code has a number of advantages: - -- the locking relation is easier to understand - actual lock usage - pinpoints the critical sections. cli() usage is too opaque. - Easier to understand means it's easier to debug. - -- it's faster, because spinlocks are faster to acquire than the - potentially heavily-used IRQ lock. Furthermore, your driver does - not have to wait eg. for a big heavy SCSI interrupt to finish, - because the driver_lock spinlock is only used by your driver. - cli() on the other hand was used by many drivers, and extended - the critical section to the whole IRQ handler function - creating - serious lock contention. - - -to make the transition easier, we've still kept the cli(), sti(), -save_flags(), save_flags_cli() and restore_flags() macros defined -on UP systems - but their usage will be phased out until 2.6 is -released. - -drivers that want to disable local interrupts (interrupts on the -current CPU), can use the following five macros: - - local_irq_disable(), local_irq_enable(), local_save_flags(flags), - local_irq_save(flags), local_irq_restore(flags) - -but beware, their meaning and semantics are much simpler, far from -that of the old cli(), sti(), save_flags(flags) and restore_flags(flags) -SMP meaning: - - local_irq_disable() => turn local IRQs off - - local_irq_enable() => turn local IRQs on - - local_save_flags(flags) => save the current IRQ state into flags. The - state can be on or off. (on some - architectures there's even more bits in it.) - - local_irq_save(flags) => save the current IRQ state into flags and - disable interrupts. - - local_irq_restore(flags) => restore the IRQ state from flags. - -(local_irq_save can save both irqs on and irqs off state, and -local_irq_restore can restore into both irqs on and irqs off state.) - -another related change is that synchronize_irq() now takes a parameter: -synchronize_irq(irq). This change too has the purpose of making SMP -synchronization more lightweight - this way you can wait for your own -interrupt handler to finish, no need to wait for other IRQ sources. - - -why were these changes done? The main reason was the architectural burden -of maintaining the cli()/sti() interface - it became a real problem. The -new interrupt system is much more streamlined, easier to understand, debug, -and it's also a bit faster - the same happened to it that will happen to -cli()/sti() using drivers once they convert to spinlocks :-) - diff --git a/Documentation/connector/Makefile b/Documentation/connector/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8df1a7285a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/connector/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +ifneq ($(CONFIG_CONNECTOR),) +obj-m += cn_test.o +endif + +# List of programs to build +hostprogs-y := ucon + +# Tell kbuild to always build the programs +always := $(hostprogs-y) + +HOSTCFLAGS_ucon.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include diff --git a/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt b/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt index 866b9cd9a95..9b53d582736 100644 --- a/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt @@ -242,8 +242,7 @@ rmdir() if there are no tasks. 1. Add support for accounting huge pages (as a separate controller) 2. Make per-cgroup scanner reclaim not-shared pages first 3. Teach controller to account for shared-pages -4. Start reclamation when the limit is lowered -5. Start reclamation in the background when the limit is +4. Start reclamation in the background when the limit is not yet hit but the usage is getting closer Summary diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt index dcec0564d04..5b0cfa67aff 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ around '10000' or more. show_sampling_rate_(min|max): the minimum and maximum sampling rates available that you may set 'sampling_rate' to. -up_threshold: defines what the average CPU usaged between the samplings +up_threshold: defines what the average CPU usage between the samplings of 'sampling_rate' needs to be for the kernel to make a decision on whether it should increase the frequency. For example when it is set to its default value of '80' it means that between the checking diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt b/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt index ba0aacde94f..94bbc27ddd4 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt @@ -59,15 +59,10 @@ apicid values in those tables for disabled apics. In the event BIOS doesn't mark such hot-pluggable cpus as disabled entries, one could use this parameter "additional_cpus=x" to represent those cpus in the cpu_possible_map. -s390 uses the number of cpus it detects at IPL time to also the number of bits -in cpu_possible_map. If it is desired to add additional cpus at a later time -the number should be specified using this option or the possible_cpus option. - possible_cpus=n [s390 only] use this to set hotpluggable cpus. This option sets possible_cpus bits in cpu_possible_map. Thus keeping the numbers of bits set constant even if the machine gets rebooted. - This option overrides additional_cpus. CPU maps and such ----------------- diff --git a/Documentation/cpusets.txt b/Documentation/cpusets.txt index 1f5a924d1e5..47e568a9370 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpusets.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpusets.txt @@ -635,14 +635,16 @@ prior 'mems' setting, will not be moved. There is an exception to the above. If hotplug functionality is used to remove all the CPUs that are currently assigned to a cpuset, -then the kernel will automatically update the cpus_allowed of all -tasks attached to CPUs in that cpuset to allow all CPUs. When memory -hotplug functionality for removing Memory Nodes is available, a -similar exception is expected to apply there as well. In general, -the kernel prefers to violate cpuset placement, over starving a task -that has had all its allowed CPUs or Memory Nodes taken offline. User -code should reconfigure cpusets to only refer to online CPUs and Memory -Nodes when using hotplug to add or remove such resources. +then all the tasks in that cpuset will be moved to the nearest ancestor +with non-empty cpus. But the moving of some (or all) tasks might fail if +cpuset is bound with another cgroup subsystem which has some restrictions +on task attaching. In this failing case, those tasks will stay +in the original cpuset, and the kernel will automatically update +their cpus_allowed to allow all online CPUs. When memory hotplug +functionality for removing Memory Nodes is available, a similar exception +is expected to apply there as well. In general, the kernel prefers to +violate cpuset placement, over starving a task that has had all +its allowed CPUs or Memory Nodes taken offline. There is a second exception to the above. GFP_ATOMIC requests are kernel internal allocations that must be satisfied, immediately. diff --git a/Documentation/devices.txt b/Documentation/devices.txt index e6244cde26e..05c80645e4e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devices.txt +++ b/Documentation/devices.txt @@ -2560,9 +2560,6 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated. 96 = /dev/usb/hiddev0 1st USB HID device ... 111 = /dev/usb/hiddev15 16th USB HID device - 112 = /dev/usb/auer0 1st auerswald ISDN device - ... - 127 = /dev/usb/auer15 16th auerswald ISDN device 128 = /dev/usb/brlvgr0 First Braille Voyager device ... 131 = /dev/usb/brlvgr3 Fourth Braille Voyager device diff --git a/Documentation/dontdiff b/Documentation/dontdiff index 881e6dd03ae..27809357da5 100644 --- a/Documentation/dontdiff +++ b/Documentation/dontdiff @@ -5,6 +5,8 @@ *.css *.dvi *.eps +*.fw.gen.S +*.fw *.gif *.grep *.grp diff --git a/Documentation/edac.txt b/Documentation/edac.txt index a5c36842ece..8eda3fb6641 100644 --- a/Documentation/edac.txt +++ b/Documentation/edac.txt @@ -222,74 +222,9 @@ both csrow2 and csrow3 are populated, this indicates a dual ranked set of DIMMs for channels 0 and 1. -Within each of the 'mc','mcX' and 'csrowX' directories are several +Within each of the 'mcX' and 'csrowX' directories are several EDAC control and attribute files. - -============================================================================ -DIRECTORY 'mc' - -In directory 'mc' are EDAC system overall control and attribute files: - - -Panic on UE control file: - - 'edac_mc_panic_on_ue' - - An uncorrectable error will cause a machine panic. This is usually - desirable. It is a bad idea to continue when an uncorrectable error - occurs - it is indeterminate what was uncorrected and the operating - system context might be so mangled that continuing will lead to further - corruption. If the kernel has MCE configured, then EDAC will never - notice the UE. - - LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: panic_on_ue=[0|1] - - RUN TIME: echo "1" >/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/edac_mc_panic_on_ue - - -Log UE control file: - - 'edac_mc_log_ue' - - Generate kernel messages describing uncorrectable errors. These errors - are reported through the system message log system. UE statistics - will be accumulated even when UE logging is disabled. - - LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: log_ue=[0|1] - - RUN TIME: echo "1" >/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/edac_mc_log_ue - - -Log CE control file: - - 'edac_mc_log_ce' - - Generate kernel messages describing correctable errors. These - errors are reported through the system message log system. - CE statistics will be accumulated even when CE logging is disabled. - - LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: log_ce=[0|1] - - RUN TIME: echo "1" >/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/edac_mc_log_ce - - -Polling period control file: - - 'edac_mc_poll_msec' - - The time period, in milliseconds, for polling for error information. - Too small a value wastes resources. Too large a value might delay - necessary handling of errors and might loose valuable information for - locating the error. 1000 milliseconds (once each second) is the current - default. Systems which require all the bandwidth they can get, may - increase this. - - LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: poll_msec=[0|1] - - RUN TIME: echo "1000" >/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/edac_mc_poll_msec - - ============================================================================ 'mcX' DIRECTORIES @@ -392,7 +327,7 @@ Sdram memory scrubbing rate: 'sdram_scrub_rate' Read/Write attribute file that controls memory scrubbing. The scrubbing - rate is set by writing a minimum bandwith in bytes/sec to the attribute + rate is set by writing a minimum bandwidth in bytes/sec to the attribute file. The rate will be translated to an internal value that gives at least the specified rate. @@ -537,7 +472,6 @@ Channel 1 DIMM Label control file: motherboard specific and determination of this information must occur in userland at this time. - ============================================================================ SYSTEM LOGGING @@ -570,7 +504,6 @@ error type, a notice of "no info" and then an optional, driver-specific error message. - ============================================================================ PCI Bus Parity Detection @@ -604,6 +537,74 @@ Enable/Disable PCI Parity checking control file: echo "0" >/sys/devices/system/edac/pci/check_pci_parity +Parity Count: + + 'pci_parity_count' + + This attribute file will display the number of parity errors that + have been detected. + + +============================================================================ +MODULE PARAMETERS + +Panic on UE control file: + + 'edac_mc_panic_on_ue' + + An uncorrectable error will cause a machine panic. This is usually + desirable. It is a bad idea to continue when an uncorrectable error + occurs - it is indeterminate what was uncorrected and the operating + system context might be so mangled that continuing will lead to further + corruption. If the kernel has MCE configured, then EDAC will never + notice the UE. + + LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: edac_mc_panic_on_ue=[0|1] + + RUN TIME: echo "1" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_mc_panic_on_ue + + +Log UE control file: + + 'edac_mc_log_ue' + + Generate kernel messages describing uncorrectable errors. These errors + are reported through the system message log system. UE statistics + will be accumulated even when UE logging is disabled. + + LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: edac_mc_log_ue=[0|1] + + RUN TIME: echo "1" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_mc_log_ue + + +Log CE control file: + + 'edac_mc_log_ce' + + Generate kernel messages describing correctable errors. These + errors are reported through the system message log system. + CE statistics will be accumulated even when CE logging is disabled. + + LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: edac_mc_log_ce=[0|1] + + RUN TIME: echo "1" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_mc_log_ce + + +Polling period control file: + + 'edac_mc_poll_msec' + + The time period, in milliseconds, for polling for error information. + Too small a value wastes resources. Too large a value might delay + necessary handling of errors and might loose valuable information for + locating the error. 1000 milliseconds (once each second) is the current + default. Systems which require all the bandwidth they can get, may + increase this. + + LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: edac_mc_poll_msec=[0|1] + + RUN TIME: echo "1000" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_mc_poll_msec + Panic on PCI PARITY Error: @@ -614,21 +615,13 @@ Panic on PCI PARITY Error: error has been detected. - module/kernel parameter: panic_on_pci_parity=[0|1] + module/kernel parameter: edac_panic_on_pci_pe=[0|1] Enable: - echo "1" >/sys/devices/system/edac/pci/panic_on_pci_parity + echo "1" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_panic_on_pci_pe Disable: - echo "0" >/sys/devices/system/edac/pci/panic_on_pci_parity - - -Parity Count: - - 'pci_parity_count' - - This attribute file will display the number of parity errors that - have been detected. + echo "0" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_panic_on_pci_pe diff --git a/Documentation/fb/sh7760fb.txt b/Documentation/fb/sh7760fb.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c87bfe5c630 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/fb/sh7760fb.txt @@ -0,0 +1,131 @@ +SH7760/SH7763 integrated LCDC Framebuffer driver +================================================ + +0. Overwiew +----------- +The SH7760/SH7763 have an integrated LCD Display controller (LCDC) which +supports (in theory) resolutions ranging from 1x1 to 1024x1024, +with color depths ranging from 1 to 16 bits, on STN, DSTN and TFT Panels. + +Caveats: +* Framebuffer memory must be a large chunk allocated at the top + of Area3 (HW requirement). Because of this requirement you should NOT + make the driver a module since at runtime it may become impossible to + get a large enough contiguous chunk of memory. + +* The driver does not support changing resolution while loaded + (displays aren't hotpluggable anyway) + +* Heavy flickering may be observed + a) if you're using 15/16bit color modes at >= 640x480 px resolutions, + b) during PCMCIA (or any other slow bus) activity. + +* Rotation works only 90degress clockwise, and only if horizontal + resolution is <= 320 pixels. + +files: drivers/video/sh7760fb.c + include/asm-sh/sh7760fb.h + Documentation/fb/sh7760fb.txt + +1. Platform setup +----------------- +SH7760: + Video data is fetched via the DMABRG DMA engine, so you have to + configure the SH DMAC for DMABRG mode (write 0x94808080 to the + DMARSRA register somewhere at boot). + + PFC registers PCCR and PCDR must be set to peripheral mode. + (write zeros to both). + +The driver does NOT do the above for you since board setup is, well, job +of the board setup code. + +2. Panel definitions +-------------------- +The LCDC must explicitly be told about the type of LCD panel +attached. Data must be wrapped in a "struct sh7760fb_platdata" and +passed to the driver as platform_data. + +Suggest you take a closer look at the SH7760 Manual, Section 30. +(http://documentation.renesas.com/eng/products/mpumcu/e602291_sh7760.pdf) + +The following code illustrates what needs to be done to +get the framebuffer working on a 640x480 TFT: + +====================== cut here ====================================== + +#include <linux/fb.h> +#include <asm/sh7760fb.h> + +/* + * NEC NL6440bc26-01 640x480 TFT + * dotclock 25175 kHz + * Xres 640 Yres 480 + * Htotal 800 Vtotal 525 + * HsynStart 656 VsynStart 490 + * HsynLenn 30 VsynLenn 2 + * + * The linux framebuffer layer does not use the syncstart/synclen + * values but right/left/upper/lower margin values. The comments + * for the x_margin explain how to calculate those from given + * panel sync timings. + */ +static struct fb_videomode nl6448bc26 = { + .name = "NL6448BC26", + .refresh = 60, + .xres = 640, + .yres = 480, + .pixclock = 39683, /* in picoseconds! */ + .hsync_len = 30, + .vsync_len = 2, + .left_margin = 114, /* HTOT - (HSYNSLEN + HSYNSTART) */ + .right_margin = 16, /* HSYNSTART - XRES */ + .upper_margin = 33, /* VTOT - (VSYNLEN + VSYNSTART) */ + .lower_margin = 10, /* VSYNSTART - YRES */ + .sync = FB_SYNC_HOR_HIGH_ACT | FB_SYNC_VERT_HIGH_ACT, + .vmode = FB_VMODE_NONINTERLACED, + .flag = 0, +}; + +static struct sh7760fb_platdata sh7760fb_nl6448 = { + .def_mode = &nl6448bc26, + .ldmtr = LDMTR_TFT_COLOR_16, /* 16bit TFT panel */ + .lddfr = LDDFR_8BPP, /* we want 8bit output */ + .ldpmmr = 0x0070, + .ldpspr = 0x0500, + .ldaclnr = 0, + .ldickr = LDICKR_CLKSRC(LCDC_CLKSRC_EXTERNAL) | + LDICKR_CLKDIV(1), + .rotate = 0, + .novsync = 1, + .blank = NULL, +}; + +/* SH7760: + * 0xFE300800: 256 * 4byte xRGB palette ram + * 0xFE300C00: 42 bytes ctrl registers + */ +static struct resource sh7760_lcdc_res[] = { + [0] = { + .start = 0xFE300800, + .end = 0xFE300CFF, + .flags = IORESOURCE_MEM, + }, + [1] = { + .start = 65, + .end = 65, + .flags = IORESOURCE_IRQ, + }, +}; + +static struct platform_device sh7760_lcdc_dev = { + .dev = { + .platform_data = &sh7760fb_nl6448, + }, + .name = "sh7760-lcdc", + .id = -1, + .resource = sh7760_lcdc_res, + .num_resources = ARRAY_SIZE(sh7760_lcdc_res), +}; + +====================== cut here ====================================== diff --git a/Documentation/fb/tridentfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/tridentfb.txt index 8a6c8a43e6a..45d9de5b13a 100644 --- a/Documentation/fb/tridentfb.txt +++ b/Documentation/fb/tridentfb.txt @@ -3,11 +3,25 @@ Tridentfb is a framebuffer driver for some Trident chip based cards. The following list of chips is thought to be supported although not all are tested: -those from the Image series with Cyber in their names - accelerated -those with Blade in their names (Blade3D,CyberBlade...) - accelerated -the newer CyberBladeXP family - nonaccelerated - -Only PCI/AGP based cards are supported, none of the older Tridents. +those from the TGUI series 9440/96XX and with Cyber in their names +those from the Image series and with Cyber in their names +those with Blade in their names (Blade3D,CyberBlade...) +the newer CyberBladeXP family + +All families are accelerated. Only PCI/AGP based cards are supported, +none of the older Tridents. +The driver supports 8, 16 and 32 bits per pixel depths. +The TGUI family requires a line length to be power of 2 if acceleration +is enabled. This means that range of possible resolutions and bpp is +limited comparing to the range if acceleration is disabled (see list +of parameters below). + +Known bugs: +1. The driver randomly locks up on 3DImage975 chip with acceleration + enabled. The same happens in X11 (Xorg). +2. The ramdac speeds require some more fine tuning. It is possible to + switch resolution which the chip does not support at some depths for + older chips. How to use it? ============== @@ -17,12 +31,11 @@ video=tridentfb The parameters for tridentfb are concatenated with a ':' as in this example. -video=tridentfb:800x600,bpp=16,noaccel +video=tridentfb:800x600-16@75,noaccel The second level parameters that tridentfb understands are: noaccel - turns off acceleration (when it doesn't work for your card) -accel - force text acceleration (for boards which by default are noacceled) fp - use flat panel related stuff crt - assume monitor is present instead of fp @@ -31,21 +44,24 @@ center - for flat panels and resolutions smaller than native size center the image, otherwise use stretch -memsize - integer value in Kb, use if your card's memory size is misdetected. +memsize - integer value in KB, use if your card's memory size is misdetected. look at the driver output to see what it says when initializing. -memdiff - integer value in Kb,should be nonzero if your card reports - more memory than it actually has.For instance mine is 192K less than + +memdiff - integer value in KB, should be nonzero if your card reports + more memory than it actually has. For instance mine is 192K less than detection says in all three BIOS selectable situations 2M, 4M, 8M. Only use if your video memory is taken from main memory hence of - configurable size.Otherwise use memsize. - If in some modes which barely fit the memory you see garbage at the bottom - this might help by not letting change to that mode anymore. + configurable size. Otherwise use memsize. + If in some modes which barely fit the memory you see garbage + at the bottom this might help by not letting change to that mode + anymore. nativex - the width in pixels of the flat panel.If you know it (usually 1024 800 or 1280) and it is not what the driver seems to detect use it. -bpp - bits per pixel (8,16 or 32) -mode - a mode name like 800x600 (as described in Documentation/fb/modedb.txt) +bpp - bits per pixel (8,16 or 32) +mode - a mode name like 800x600-8@75 as described in + Documentation/fb/modedb.txt Using insane values for the above parameters will probably result in driver misbehaviour so take care(for instance memsize=12345678 or memdiff=23784 or diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index 9f73587219e..83c88cae1ed 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -19,15 +19,6 @@ Who: Pavel Machek <pavel@suse.cz> --------------------------- -What: old NCR53C9x driver -When: October 2007 -Why: Replaced by the much better esp_scsi driver. Actual low-level - driver can be ported over almost trivially. -Who: David Miller <davem@davemloft.net> - Christoph Hellwig <hch@lst.de> - ---------------------------- - What: Video4Linux API 1 ioctls and video_decoder.h from Video devices. When: December 2008 Files: include/linux/video_decoder.h include/linux/videodev.h @@ -47,6 +38,30 @@ Who: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org> --------------------------- +What: old tuner-3036 i2c driver +When: 2.6.28 +Why: This driver is for VERY old i2c-over-parallel port teletext receiver + boxes. Rather then spending effort on converting this driver to V4L2, + and since it is extremely unlikely that anyone still uses one of these + devices, it was decided to drop it. +Who: Hans Verkuil <hverkuil@xs4all.nl> + Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org> + + --------------------------- + +What: V4L2 dpc7146 driver +When: 2.6.28 +Why: Old driver for the dpc7146 demonstration board that is no longer + relevant. The last time this was tested on actual hardware was + probably around 2002. Since this is a driver for a demonstration + board the decision was made to remove it rather than spending a + lot of effort continually updating this driver to stay in sync + with the latest internal V4L2 or I2C API. +Who: Hans Verkuil <hverkuil@xs4all.nl> + Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org> + +--------------------------- + What: PCMCIA control ioctl (needed for pcmcia-cs [cardmgr, cardctl]) When: November 2005 Files: drivers/pcmcia/: pcmcia_ioctl.c @@ -138,24 +153,6 @@ Who: Kay Sievers <kay.sievers@suse.de> --------------------------- -What: find_task_by_pid -When: 2.6.26 -Why: With pid namespaces, calling this funciton will return the - wrong task when called from inside a namespace. - - The best way to save a task pid and find a task by this - pid later, is to find this task's struct pid pointer (or get - it directly from the task) and call pid_task() later. - - If someone really needs to get a task by its pid_t, then - he most likely needs the find_task_by_vpid() to get the - task from the same namespace as the current task is in, but - this may be not so in general. - -Who: Pavel Emelyanov <xemul@openvz.org> - ---------------------------- - What: ACPI procfs interface When: July 2008 Why: ACPI sysfs conversion should be finished by January 2008. @@ -199,19 +196,6 @@ Who: Tejun Heo <htejun@gmail.com> --------------------------- -What: The arch/ppc and include/asm-ppc directories -When: Jun 2008 -Why: The arch/powerpc tree is the merged architecture for ppc32 and ppc64 - platforms. Currently there are efforts underway to port the remaining - arch/ppc platforms to the merged tree. New submissions to the arch/ppc - tree have been frozen with the 2.6.22 kernel release and that tree will - remain in bug-fix only mode until its scheduled removal. Platforms - that are not ported by June 2008 will be removed due to the lack of an - interested maintainer. -Who: linuxppc-dev@ozlabs.org - ---------------------------- - What: i386/x86_64 bzImage symlinks When: April 2010 @@ -300,14 +284,6 @@ Who: ocfs2-devel@oss.oracle.com --------------------------- -What: asm/semaphore.h -When: 2.6.26 -Why: Implementation became generic; users should now include - linux/semaphore.h instead. -Who: Matthew Wilcox <willy@linux.intel.com> - ---------------------------- - What: SCTP_GET_PEER_ADDRS_NUM_OLD, SCTP_GET_PEER_ADDRS_OLD, SCTP_GET_LOCAL_ADDRS_NUM_OLD, SCTP_GET_LOCAL_ADDRS_OLD When: June 2009 @@ -346,3 +322,11 @@ Why: Accounting can now be enabled/disabled without kernel recompilation. controlled by a kernel/module/sysfs/sysctl parameter. Who: Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki <ole@ans.pl> +--------------------------- + +What: ide-scsi (BLK_DEV_IDESCSI) +When: 2.6.29 +Why: The 2.6 kernel supports direct writing to ide CD drives, which + eliminates the need for ide-scsi. The new method is more + efficient in every way. +Who: FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp> diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking index 8b22d7d8b99..8362860e21a 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking @@ -144,8 +144,8 @@ prototypes: void (*kill_sb) (struct super_block *); locking rules: may block BKL -get_sb yes yes -kill_sb yes yes +get_sb yes no +kill_sb yes no ->get_sb() returns error or 0 with locked superblock attached to the vfsmount (exclusive on ->s_umount). @@ -409,12 +409,12 @@ ioctl: yes (see below) unlocked_ioctl: no (see below) compat_ioctl: no mmap: no -open: maybe (see below) +open: no flush: no release: no fsync: no (see below) aio_fsync: no -fasync: yes (see below) +fasync: no lock: yes readv: no writev: no @@ -431,13 +431,6 @@ For many filesystems, it is probably safe to acquire the inode semaphore. Note some filesystems (i.e. remote ones) provide no protection for i_size so you will need to use the BKL. -->open() locking is in-transit: big lock partially moved into the methods. -The only exception is ->open() in the instances of file_operations that never -end up in ->i_fop/->proc_fops, i.e. ones that belong to character devices -(chrdev_open() takes lock before replacing ->f_op and calling the secondary -method. As soon as we fix the handling of module reference counters all -instances of ->open() will be called without the BKL. - Note: ext2_release() was *the* source of contention on fs-intensive loads and dropping BKL on ->release() helps to get rid of that (we still grab BKL for cases when we close a file that had been opened r/w, but that @@ -510,6 +503,7 @@ prototypes: void (*close)(struct vm_area_struct*); int (*fault)(struct vm_area_struct*, struct vm_fault *); int (*page_mkwrite)(struct vm_area_struct *, struct page *); + int (*access)(struct vm_area_struct *, unsigned long, void*, int, int); locking rules: BKL mmap_sem PageLocked(page) @@ -517,6 +511,7 @@ open: no yes close: no yes fault: no yes page_mkwrite: no yes no +access: no yes ->page_mkwrite() is called when a previously read-only page is about to become writeable. The file system is responsible for @@ -525,6 +520,11 @@ taking to lock out truncate, the page range should be verified to be within i_size. The page mapping should also be checked that it is not NULL. + ->access() is called when get_user_pages() fails in +acces_process_vm(), typically used to debug a process through +/proc/pid/mem or ptrace. This function is needed only for +VM_IO | VM_PFNMAP VMAs. + ================================================================================ Dubious stuff diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/Makefile b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..be7ec5e67db --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +ifneq ($(CONFIG_CONFIGFS_FS),) +obj-m += configfs_example_explicit.o configfs_example_macros.o +endif diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt index 44c97e6accb..fabcb0e00f2 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt @@ -311,9 +311,20 @@ the subsystem must be ready for it. [An Example] The best example of these basic concepts is the simple_children -subsystem/group and the simple_child item in configfs_example.c It -shows a trivial object displaying and storing an attribute, and a simple -group creating and destroying these children. +subsystem/group and the simple_child item in configfs_example_explicit.c +and configfs_example_macros.c. It shows a trivial object displaying and +storing an attribute, and a simple group creating and destroying these +children. + +The only difference between configfs_example_explicit.c and +configfs_example_macros.c is how the attributes of the childless item +are defined. The childless item has extended attributes, each with +their own show()/store() operation. This follows a convention commonly +used in sysfs. configfs_example_explicit.c creates these attributes +by explicitly defining the structures involved. Conversely +configfs_example_macros.c uses some convenience macros from configfs.h +to define the attributes. These macros are similar to their sysfs +counterparts. [Hierarchy Navigation and the Subsystem Mutex] diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example.c b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_explicit.c index 03964879170..d428cc9f07f 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example.c +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_explicit.c @@ -1,8 +1,10 @@ /* * vim: noexpandtab ts=8 sts=0 sw=8: * - * configfs_example.c - This file is a demonstration module containing - * a number of configfs subsystems. + * configfs_example_explicit.c - This file is a demonstration module + * containing a number of configfs subsystems. It explicitly defines + * each structure without using the helper macros defined in + * configfs.h. * * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or * modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public @@ -281,7 +283,6 @@ static struct config_item *simple_children_make_item(struct config_group *group, if (!simple_child) return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM); - config_item_init_type_name(&simple_child->item, name, &simple_child_type); @@ -302,8 +303,8 @@ static struct configfs_attribute *simple_children_attrs[] = { }; static ssize_t simple_children_attr_show(struct config_item *item, - struct configfs_attribute *attr, - char *page) + struct configfs_attribute *attr, + char *page) { return sprintf(page, "[02-simple-children]\n" @@ -318,7 +319,7 @@ static void simple_children_release(struct config_item *item) } static struct configfs_item_operations simple_children_item_ops = { - .release = simple_children_release, + .release = simple_children_release, .show_attribute = simple_children_attr_show, }; @@ -368,7 +369,6 @@ static struct config_group *group_children_make_group(struct config_group *group if (!simple_children) return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM); - config_group_init_type_name(&simple_children->group, name, &simple_children_type); @@ -387,8 +387,8 @@ static struct configfs_attribute *group_children_attrs[] = { }; static ssize_t group_children_attr_show(struct config_item *item, - struct configfs_attribute *attr, - char *page) + struct configfs_attribute *attr, + char *page) { return sprintf(page, "[03-group-children]\n" diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_macros.c b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_macros.c new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d8e30a0378a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_macros.c @@ -0,0 +1,448 @@ +/* + * vim: noexpandtab ts=8 sts=0 sw=8: + * + * configfs_example_macros.c - This file is a demonstration module + * containing a number of configfs subsystems. It uses the helper + * macros defined by configfs.h + * + * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or + * modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public + * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either + * version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. + * + * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU + * General Public License for more details. + * + * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public + * License along with this program; if not, write to the + * Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, + * Boston, MA 021110-1307, USA. + * + * Based on sysfs: + * sysfs is Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003 Patrick Mochel + * + * configfs Copyright (C) 2005 Oracle. All rights reserved. + */ + +#include <linux/init.h> +#include <linux/module.h> +#include <linux/slab.h> + +#include <linux/configfs.h> + + + +/* + * 01-childless + * + * This first example is a childless subsystem. It cannot create + * any config_items. It just has attributes. + * + * Note that we are enclosing the configfs_subsystem inside a container. + * This is not necessary if a subsystem has no attributes directly + * on the subsystem. See the next example, 02-simple-children, for + * such a subsystem. + */ + +struct childless { + struct configfs_subsystem subsys; + int showme; + int storeme; +}; + +static inline struct childless *to_childless(struct config_item *item) +{ + return item ? container_of(to_configfs_subsystem(to_config_group(item)), struct childless, subsys) : NULL; +} + +CONFIGFS_ATTR_STRUCT(childless); +#define CHILDLESS_ATTR(_name, _mode, _show, _store) \ +struct childless_attribute childless_attr_##_name = __CONFIGFS_ATTR(_name, _mode, _show, _store) +#define CHILDLESS_ATTR_RO(_name, _show) \ +struct childless_attribute childless_attr_##_name = __CONFIGFS_ATTR_RO(_name, _show); + +static ssize_t childless_showme_read(struct childless *childless, + char *page) +{ + ssize_t pos; + + pos = sprintf(page, "%d\n", childless->showme); + childless->showme++; + + return pos; +} + +static ssize_t childless_storeme_read(struct childless *childless, + char *page) +{ + return sprintf(page, "%d\n", childless->storeme); +} + +static ssize_t childless_storeme_write(struct childless *childless, + const char *page, + size_t count) +{ + unsigned long tmp; + char *p = (char *) page; + + tmp = simple_strtoul(p, &p, 10); + if (!p || (*p && (*p != '\n'))) + return -EINVAL; + + if (tmp > INT_MAX) + return -ERANGE; + + childless->storeme = tmp; + + return count; +} + +static ssize_t childless_description_read(struct childless *childless, + char *page) +{ + return sprintf(page, +"[01-childless]\n" +"\n" +"The childless subsystem is the simplest possible subsystem in\n" +"configfs. It does not support the creation of child config_items.\n" +"It only has a few attributes. In fact, it isn't much different\n" +"than a directory in /proc.\n"); +} + +CHILDLESS_ATTR_RO(showme, childless_showme_read); +CHILDLESS_ATTR(storeme, S_IRUGO | S_IWUSR, childless_storeme_read, + childless_storeme_write); +CHILDLESS_ATTR_RO(description, childless_description_read); + +static struct configfs_attribute *childless_attrs[] = { + &childless_attr_showme.attr, + &childless_attr_storeme.attr, + &childless_attr_description.attr, + NULL, +}; + +CONFIGFS_ATTR_OPS(childless); +static struct configfs_item_operations childless_item_ops = { + .show_attribute = childless_attr_show, + .store_attribute = childless_attr_store, +}; + +static struct config_item_type childless_type = { + .ct_item_ops = &childless_item_ops, + .ct_attrs = childless_attrs, + .ct_owner = THIS_MODULE, +}; + +static struct childless childless_subsys = { + .subsys = { + .su_group = { + .cg_item = { + .ci_namebuf = "01-childless", + .ci_type = &childless_type, + }, + }, + }, +}; + + +/* ----------------------------------------------------------------- */ + +/* + * 02-simple-children + * + * This example merely has a simple one-attribute child. Note that + * there is no extra attribute structure, as the child's attribute is + * known from the get-go. Also, there is no container for the + * subsystem, as it has no attributes of its own. + */ + +struct simple_child { + struct config_item item; + int storeme; +}; + +static inline struct simple_child *to_simple_child(struct config_item *item) +{ + return item ? container_of(item, struct simple_child, item) : NULL; +} + +static struct configfs_attribute simple_child_attr_storeme = { + .ca_owner = THIS_MODULE, + .ca_name = "storeme", + .ca_mode = S_IRUGO | S_IWUSR, +}; + +static struct configfs_attribute *simple_child_attrs[] = { + &simple_child_attr_storeme, + NULL, +}; + +static ssize_t simple_child_attr_show(struct config_item *item, + struct configfs_attribute *attr, + char *page) +{ + ssize_t count; + struct simple_child *simple_child = to_simple_child(item); + + count = sprintf(page, "%d\n", simple_child->storeme); + + return count; +} + +static ssize_t simple_child_attr_store(struct config_item *item, + struct configfs_attribute *attr, + const char *page, size_t count) +{ + struct simple_child *simple_child = to_simple_child(item); + unsigned long tmp; + char *p = (char *) page; + + tmp = simple_strtoul(p, &p, 10); + if (!p || (*p && (*p != '\n'))) + return -EINVAL; + + if (tmp > INT_MAX) + return -ERANGE; + + simple_child->storeme = tmp; + + return count; +} + +static void simple_child_release(struct config_item *item) +{ + kfree(to_simple_child(item)); +} + +static struct configfs_item_operations simple_child_item_ops = { + .release = simple_child_release, + .show_attribute = simple_child_attr_show, + .store_attribute = simple_child_attr_store, +}; + +static struct config_item_type simple_child_type = { + .ct_item_ops = &simple_child_item_ops, + .ct_attrs = simple_child_attrs, + .ct_owner = THIS_MODULE, +}; + + +struct simple_children { + struct config_group group; +}; + +static inline struct simple_children *to_simple_children(struct config_item *item) +{ + return item ? container_of(to_config_group(item), struct simple_children, group) : NULL; +} + +static struct config_item *simple_children_make_item(struct config_group *group, const char *name) +{ + struct simple_child *simple_child; + + simple_child = kzalloc(sizeof(struct simple_child), GFP_KERNEL); + if (!simple_child) + return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM); + + config_item_init_type_name(&simple_child->item, name, + &simple_child_type); + + simple_child->storeme = 0; + + return &simple_child->item; +} + +static struct configfs_attribute simple_children_attr_description = { + .ca_owner = THIS_MODULE, + .ca_name = "description", + .ca_mode = S_IRUGO, +}; + +static struct configfs_attribute *simple_children_attrs[] = { + &simple_children_attr_description, + NULL, +}; + +static ssize_t simple_children_attr_show(struct config_item *item, + struct configfs_attribute *attr, + char *page) +{ + return sprintf(page, +"[02-simple-children]\n" +"\n" +"This subsystem allows the creation of child config_items. These\n" +"items have only one attribute that is readable and writeable.\n"); +} + +static void simple_children_release(struct config_item *item) +{ + kfree(to_simple_children(item)); +} + +static struct configfs_item_operations simple_children_item_ops = { + .release = simple_children_release, + .show_attribute = simple_children_attr_show, +}; + +/* + * Note that, since no extra work is required on ->drop_item(), + * no ->drop_item() is provided. + */ +static struct configfs_group_operations simple_children_group_ops = { + .make_item = simple_children_make_item, +}; + +static struct config_item_type simple_children_type = { + .ct_item_ops = &simple_children_item_ops, + .ct_group_ops = &simple_children_group_ops, + .ct_attrs = simple_children_attrs, + .ct_owner = THIS_MODULE, +}; + +static struct configfs_subsystem simple_children_subsys = { + .su_group = { + .cg_item = { + .ci_namebuf = "02-simple-children", + .ci_type = &simple_children_type, + }, + }, +}; + + +/* ----------------------------------------------------------------- */ + +/* + * 03-group-children + * + * This example reuses the simple_children group from above. However, + * the simple_children group is not the subsystem itself, it is a + * child of the subsystem. Creation of a group in the subsystem creates + * a new simple_children group. That group can then have simple_child + * children of its own. + */ + +static struct config_group *group_children_make_group(struct config_group *group, const char *name) +{ + struct simple_children *simple_children; + + simple_children = kzalloc(sizeof(struct simple_children), + GFP_KERNEL); + if (!simple_children) + return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM); + + config_group_init_type_name(&simple_children->group, name, + &simple_children_type); + + return &simple_children->group; +} + +static struct configfs_attribute group_children_attr_description = { + .ca_owner = THIS_MODULE, + .ca_name = "description", + .ca_mode = S_IRUGO, +}; + +static struct configfs_attribute *group_children_attrs[] = { + &group_children_attr_description, + NULL, +}; + +static ssize_t group_children_attr_show(struct config_item *item, + struct configfs_attribute *attr, + char *page) +{ + return sprintf(page, +"[03-group-children]\n" +"\n" +"This subsystem allows the creation of child config_groups. These\n" +"groups are like the subsystem simple-children.\n"); +} + +static struct configfs_item_operations group_children_item_ops = { + .show_attribute = group_children_attr_show, +}; + +/* + * Note that, since no extra work is required on ->drop_item(), + * no ->drop_item() is provided. + */ +static struct configfs_group_operations group_children_group_ops = { + .make_group = group_children_make_group, +}; + +static struct config_item_type group_children_type = { + .ct_item_ops = &group_children_item_ops, + .ct_group_ops = &group_children_group_ops, + .ct_attrs = group_children_attrs, + .ct_owner = THIS_MODULE, +}; + +static struct configfs_subsystem group_children_subsys = { + .su_group = { + .cg_item = { + .ci_namebuf = "03-group-children", + .ci_type = &group_children_type, + }, + }, +}; + +/* ----------------------------------------------------------------- */ + +/* + * We're now done with our subsystem definitions. + * For convenience in this module, here's a list of them all. It + * allows the init function to easily register them. Most modules + * will only have one subsystem, and will only call register_subsystem + * on it directly. + */ +static struct configfs_subsystem *example_subsys[] = { + &childless_subsys.subsys, + &simple_children_subsys, + &group_children_subsys, + NULL, +}; + +static int __init configfs_example_init(void) +{ + int ret; + int i; + struct configfs_subsystem *subsys; + + for (i = 0; example_subsys[i]; i++) { + subsys = example_subsys[i]; + + config_group_init(&subsys->su_group); + mutex_init(&subsys->su_mutex); + ret = configfs_register_subsystem(subsys); + if (ret) { + printk(KERN_ERR "Error %d while registering subsystem %s\n", + ret, + subsys->su_group.cg_item.ci_namebuf); + goto out_unregister; + } + } + + return 0; + +out_unregister: + for (; i >= 0; i--) { + configfs_unregister_subsystem(example_subsys[i]); + } + + return ret; +} + +static void __exit configfs_example_exit(void) +{ + int i; + + for (i = 0; example_subsys[i]; i++) { + configfs_unregister_subsystem(example_subsys[i]); + } +} + +module_init(configfs_example_init); +module_exit(configfs_example_exit); +MODULE_LICENSE("GPL"); diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt index 80e193d82e2..0d5394920a3 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt @@ -26,6 +26,12 @@ Mailing list: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/fs/ext2/e2fsprogs.git + - Note that it is highly important to install the mke2fs.conf file + that comes with the e2fsprogs 1.41.x sources in /etc/mke2fs.conf. If + you have edited the /etc/mke2fs.conf file installed on your system, + you will need to merge your changes with the version from e2fsprogs + 1.41.x. + - Create a new filesystem using the ext4dev filesystem type: # mke2fs -t ext4dev /dev/hda1 diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt index e79ee2db183..ac2a261c5f7 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ Web site ======== There is plenty of additional information on the linux-ntfs web site -at http://linux-ntfs.sourceforge.net/ +at http://www.linux-ntfs.org/ The web site has a lot of additional information, such as a comprehensive FAQ, documentation on the NTFS on-disk format, information on the Linux-NTFS @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ And you would know that /dev/hda2 has a size of 37768814 - 4209030 + 1 = For Win2k and later dynamic disks, you can for example use the ldminfo utility which is part of the Linux LDM tools (the latest version at the time of writing is linux-ldm-0.0.8.tar.bz2). You can download it from: - http://linux-ntfs.sourceforge.net/downloads.html + http://www.linux-ntfs.org/ Simply extract the downloaded archive (tar xvjf linux-ldm-0.0.8.tar.bz2), go into it (cd linux-ldm-0.0.8) and change to the test directory (cd test). You will find the precompiled (i386) ldminfo utility there. NOTE: You will not be diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/omfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/omfs.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1d0d41ff5c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/omfs.txt @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ +Optimized MPEG Filesystem (OMFS) + +Overview +======== + +OMFS is a filesystem created by SonicBlue for use in the ReplayTV DVR +and Rio Karma MP3 player. The filesystem is extent-based, utilizing +block sizes from 2k to 8k, with hash-based directories. This +filesystem driver may be used to read and write disks from these +devices. + +Note, it is not recommended that this FS be used in place of a general +filesystem for your own streaming media device. Native Linux filesystems +will likely perform better. + +More information is available at: + + http://linux-karma.sf.net/ + +Various utilities, including mkomfs and omfsck, are included with +omfsprogs, available at: + + http://bobcopeland.com/karma/ + +Instructions are included in its README. + +Options +======= + +OMFS supports the following mount-time options: + + uid=n - make all files owned by specified user + gid=n - make all files owned by specified group + umask=xxx - set permission umask to xxx + fmask=xxx - set umask to xxx for files + dmask=xxx - set umask to xxx for directories + +Disk format +=========== + +OMFS discriminates between "sysblocks" and normal data blocks. The sysblock +group consists of super block information, file metadata, directory structures, +and extents. Each sysblock has a header containing CRCs of the entire +sysblock, and may be mirrored in successive blocks on the disk. A sysblock may +have a smaller size than a data block, but since they are both addressed by the +same 64-bit block number, any remaining space in the smaller sysblock is +unused. + +Sysblock header information: + +struct omfs_header { + __be64 h_self; /* FS block where this is located */ + __be32 h_body_size; /* size of useful data after header */ + __be16 h_crc; /* crc-ccitt of body_size bytes */ + char h_fill1[2]; + u8 h_version; /* version, always 1 */ + char h_type; /* OMFS_INODE_X */ + u8 h_magic; /* OMFS_IMAGIC */ + u8 h_check_xor; /* XOR of header bytes before this */ + __be32 h_fill2; +}; + +Files and directories are both represented by omfs_inode: + +struct omfs_inode { + struct omfs_header i_head; /* header */ + __be64 i_parent; /* parent containing this inode */ + __be64 i_sibling; /* next inode in hash bucket */ + __be64 i_ctime; /* ctime, in milliseconds */ + char i_fill1[35]; + char i_type; /* OMFS_[DIR,FILE] */ + __be32 i_fill2; + char i_fill3[64]; + char i_name[OMFS_NAMELEN]; /* filename */ + __be64 i_size; /* size of file, in bytes */ +}; + +Directories in OMFS are implemented as a large hash table. Filenames are +hashed then prepended into the bucket list beginning at OMFS_DIR_START. +Lookup requires hashing the filename, then seeking across i_sibling pointers +until a match is found on i_name. Empty buckets are represented by block +pointers with all-1s (~0). + +A file is an omfs_inode structure followed by an extent table beginning at +OMFS_EXTENT_START: + +struct omfs_extent_entry { + __be64 e_cluster; /* start location of a set of blocks */ + __be64 e_blocks; /* number of blocks after e_cluster */ +}; + +struct omfs_extent { + __be64 e_next; /* next extent table location */ + __be32 e_extent_count; /* total # extents in this table */ + __be32 e_fill; + struct omfs_extent_entry e_entry; /* start of extent entries */ +}; + +Each extent holds the block offset followed by number of blocks allocated to +the extent. The final extent in each table is a terminator with e_cluster +being ~0 and e_blocks being ones'-complement of the total number of blocks +in the table. + +If this table overflows, a continuation inode is written and pointed to by +e_next. These have a header but lack the rest of the inode structure. + diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index 7f268f327d7..f566ad9bcb7 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -296,6 +296,7 @@ Table 1-4: Kernel info in /proc uptime System uptime version Kernel version video bttv info of video resources (2.4) + vmallocinfo Show vmalloced areas .............................................................................. You can, for example, check which interrupts are currently in use and what @@ -557,6 +558,49 @@ VmallocTotal: total size of vmalloc memory area VmallocUsed: amount of vmalloc area which is used VmallocChunk: largest contigious block of vmalloc area which is free +.............................................................................. + +vmallocinfo: + +Provides information about vmalloced/vmaped areas. One line per area, +containing the virtual address range of the area, size in bytes, +caller information of the creator, and optional information depending +on the kind of area : + + pages=nr number of pages + phys=addr if a physical address was specified + ioremap I/O mapping (ioremap() and friends) + vmalloc vmalloc() area + vmap vmap()ed pages + user VM_USERMAP area + vpages buffer for pages pointers was vmalloced (huge area) + N<node>=nr (Only on NUMA kernels) + Number of pages allocated on memory node <node> + +> cat /proc/vmallocinfo +0xffffc20000000000-0xffffc20000201000 2101248 alloc_large_system_hash+0x204 ... + /0x2c0 pages=512 vmalloc N0=128 N1=128 N2=128 N3=128 +0xffffc20000201000-0xffffc20000302000 1052672 alloc_large_system_hash+0x204 ... + /0x2c0 pages=256 vmalloc N0=64 N1=64 N2=64 N3=64 +0xffffc20000302000-0xffffc20000304000 8192 acpi_tb_verify_table+0x21/0x4f... + phys=7fee8000 ioremap +0xffffc20000304000-0xffffc20000307000 12288 acpi_tb_verify_table+0x21/0x4f... + phys=7fee7000 ioremap +0xffffc2000031d000-0xffffc2000031f000 8192 init_vdso_vars+0x112/0x210 +0xffffc2000031f000-0xffffc2000032b000 49152 cramfs_uncompress_init+0x2e ... + /0x80 pages=11 vmalloc N0=3 N1=3 N2=2 N3=3 +0xffffc2000033a000-0xffffc2000033d000 12288 sys_swapon+0x640/0xac0 ... + pages=2 vmalloc N1=2 +0xffffc20000347000-0xffffc2000034c000 20480 xt_alloc_table_info+0xfe ... + /0x130 [x_tables] pages=4 vmalloc N0=4 +0xffffffffa0000000-0xffffffffa000f000 61440 sys_init_module+0xc27/0x1d00 ... + pages=14 vmalloc N2=14 +0xffffffffa000f000-0xffffffffa0014000 20480 sys_init_module+0xc27/0x1d00 ... + pages=4 vmalloc N1=4 +0xffffffffa0014000-0xffffffffa0017000 12288 sys_init_module+0xc27/0x1d00 ... + pages=2 vmalloc N1=2 +0xffffffffa0017000-0xffffffffa0022000 45056 sys_init_module+0xc27/0x1d00 ... + pages=10 vmalloc N0=10 1.3 IDE devices in /proc/ide ---------------------------- @@ -887,7 +931,7 @@ group_prealloc max_to_scan mb_groups mb_history min_to_scan order2_req stats stream_req mb_groups: -This file gives the details of mutiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks +This file gives the details of multiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks mb_history: Multiblock allocation history. @@ -1295,6 +1339,25 @@ Enables/Disables the protection of the per-process proc entries "maps" and "smaps". When enabled, the contents of these files are visible only to readers that are allowed to ptrace() the given process. +msgmni +------ + +Maximum number of message queue ids on the system. +This value scales to the amount of lowmem. It is automatically recomputed +upon memory add/remove or ipc namespace creation/removal. +When a value is written into this file, msgmni's value becomes fixed, i.e. it +is not recomputed anymore when one of the above events occurs. +Use auto_msgmni to change this behavior. + +auto_msgmni +----------- + +Enables/Disables automatic recomputing of msgmni upon memory add/remove or +upon ipc namespace creation/removal (see the msgmni description above). +Echoing "1" into this file enables msgmni automatic recomputing. +Echoing "0" turns it off. +auto_msgmni default value is 1. + 2.4 /proc/sys/vm - The virtual memory subsystem ----------------------------------------------- @@ -1430,7 +1493,7 @@ used because pages_free(1355) is smaller than watermark + protection[2] normal page requirement. If requirement is DMA zone(index=0), protection[0] (=0) is used. -zone[i]'s protection[j] is calculated by following exprssion. +zone[i]'s protection[j] is calculated by following expression. (i < j): zone[i]->protection[j] @@ -2350,6 +2413,8 @@ The following 4 memory types are supported: - (bit 1) anonymous shared memory - (bit 2) file-backed private memory - (bit 3) file-backed shared memory + - (bit 4) ELF header pages in file-backed private memory areas (it is + effective only if the bit 2 is cleared) Note that MMIO pages such as frame buffer are never dumped and vDSO pages are always dumped regardless of the bitmask status. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/quota.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/quota.txt index a590c4093ef..5e8de25bf0f 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/quota.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/quota.txt @@ -3,14 +3,14 @@ Quota subsystem =============== Quota subsystem allows system administrator to set limits on used space and -number of used inodes (inode is a filesystem structure which is associated -with each file or directory) for users and/or groups. For both used space and -number of used inodes there are actually two limits. The first one is called -softlimit and the second one hardlimit. An user can never exceed a hardlimit -for any resource. User is allowed to exceed softlimit but only for limited -period of time. This period is called "grace period" or "grace time". When -grace time is over, user is not able to allocate more space/inodes until he -frees enough of them to get below softlimit. +number of used inodes (inode is a filesystem structure which is associated with +each file or directory) for users and/or groups. For both used space and number +of used inodes there are actually two limits. The first one is called softlimit +and the second one hardlimit. An user can never exceed a hardlimit for any +resource (unless he has CAP_SYS_RESOURCE capability). User is allowed to exceed +softlimit but only for limited period of time. This period is called "grace +period" or "grace time". When grace time is over, user is not able to allocate +more space/inodes until he frees enough of them to get below softlimit. Quota limits (and amount of grace time) are set independently for each filesystem. @@ -53,6 +53,12 @@ in parentheses): QUOTA_NL_BSOFTLONGWARN - space (block) softlimit is exceeded longer than given grace period. QUOTA_NL_BSOFTWARN - space (block) softlimit + - four warnings are also defined for the event when user stops + exceeding some limit: + QUOTA_NL_IHARDBELOW - inode hardlimit + QUOTA_NL_ISOFTBELOW - inode softlimit + QUOTA_NL_BHARDBELOW - space (block) hardlimit + QUOTA_NL_BSOFTBELOW - space (block) softlimit QUOTA_NL_A_DEV_MAJOR (u32) - major number of a device with the affected filesystem QUOTA_NL_A_DEV_MINOR (u32) diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt index 094f2d2f38b..510b722667a 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt @@ -294,6 +294,16 @@ user-defined data with a channel, and is immediately available (including in create_buf_file()) via chan->private_data or buf->chan->private_data. +Buffer-only channels +-------------------- + +These channels have no files associated and can be created with +relay_open(NULL, NULL, ...). Such channels are useful in scenarios such +as when doing early tracing in the kernel, before the VFS is up. In these +cases, one may open a buffer-only channel and then call +relay_late_setup_files() when the kernel is ready to handle files, +to expose the buffered data to the userspace. + Channel 'modes' --------------- diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt index 540e9e7f59c..6a0d70a22f0 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Similarly to JFFS2, UBIFS supports on-the-flight compression which makes it possible to fit quite a lot of data to the flash. Similarly to JFFS2, UBIFS is tolerant of unclean reboots and power-cuts. -It does not need stuff like ckfs.ext2. UBIFS automatically replays its +It does not need stuff like fsck.ext2. UBIFS automatically replays its journal and recovers from crashes, ensuring that the on-flash data structures are consistent. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt index 2d5e1e582e1..bbac4f1d905 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt @@ -96,6 +96,14 @@ shortname=lower|win95|winnt|mixed emulate the Windows 95 rule for create. Default setting is `lower'. +tz=UTC -- Interpret timestamps as UTC rather than local time. + This option disables the conversion of timestamps + between local time (as used by Windows on FAT) and UTC + (which Linux uses internally). This is particuluarly + useful when mounting devices (like digital cameras) + that are set to UTC in order to avoid the pitfalls of + local time. + <bool>: 0,1,yes,no,true,false TODO diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt index b7522c6cbae..c4d348dabe9 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ struct file_system_type { The get_sb() method has the following arguments: - struct file_system_type *fs_type: decribes the filesystem, partly initialized + struct file_system_type *fs_type: describes the filesystem, partly initialized by the specific filesystem code int flags: mount flags @@ -895,9 +895,9 @@ struct dentry_operations { iput() yourself d_dname: called when the pathname of a dentry should be generated. - Usefull for some pseudo filesystems (sockfs, pipefs, ...) to delay + Useful for some pseudo filesystems (sockfs, pipefs, ...) to delay pathname generation. (Instead of doing it when dentry is created, - its done only when the path is needed.). Real filesystems probably + it's done only when the path is needed.). Real filesystems probably dont want to use it, because their dentries are present in global dcache hash, so their hash should be an invariant. As no lock is held, d_dname() should not try to modify the dentry itself, unless diff --git a/Documentation/ftrace.txt b/Documentation/ftrace.txt index f218f616ff6..d330fe3103d 100644 --- a/Documentation/ftrace.txt +++ b/Documentation/ftrace.txt @@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ Copyright 2008 Red Hat Inc. Author: Steven Rostedt <srostedt@redhat.com> License: The GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2 + (dual licensed under the GPL v2) Reviewers: Elias Oltmanns, Randy Dunlap, Andrew Morton, John Kacur, and David Teigland. diff --git a/Documentation/gpio.txt b/Documentation/gpio.txt index c35ca9e40d4..18022e249c5 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/gpio.txt @@ -347,15 +347,12 @@ necessarily be nonportable. Dynamic definition of GPIOs is not currently standard; for example, as a side effect of configuring an add-on board with some GPIO expanders. -These calls are purely for kernel space, but a userspace API could be built -on top of them. - GPIO implementor's framework (OPTIONAL) ======================================= As noted earlier, there is an optional implementation framework making it easier for platforms to support different kinds of GPIO controller using -the same programming interface. +the same programming interface. This framework is called "gpiolib". As a debugging aid, if debugfs is available a /sys/kernel/debug/gpio file will be found there. That will list all the controllers registered through @@ -392,11 +389,21 @@ either NULL or the label associated with that GPIO when it was requested. Platform Support ---------------- -To support this framework, a platform's Kconfig will "select HAVE_GPIO_LIB" +To support this framework, a platform's Kconfig will "select" either +ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB or ARCH_WANT_OPTIONAL_GPIOLIB and arrange that its <asm/gpio.h> includes <asm-generic/gpio.h> and defines three functions: gpio_get_value(), gpio_set_value(), and gpio_cansleep(). They may also want to provide a custom value for ARCH_NR_GPIOS. +ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB means that the gpio-lib code will always get compiled +into the kernel on that architecture. + +ARCH_WANT_OPTIONAL_GPIOLIB means the gpio-lib code defaults to off and the user +can enable it and build it into the kernel optionally. + +If neither of these options are selected, the platform does not support +GPIOs through GPIO-lib and the code cannot be enabled by the user. + Trivial implementations of those functions can directly use framework code, which always dispatches through the gpio_chip: @@ -439,4 +446,120 @@ becomes available. That may mean the device should not be registered until calls for that GPIO can work. One way to address such dependencies is for such gpio_chip controllers to provide setup() and teardown() callbacks to board specific code; those board specific callbacks would register devices -once all the necessary resources are available. +once all the necessary resources are available, and remove them later when +the GPIO controller device becomes unavailable. + + +Sysfs Interface for Userspace (OPTIONAL) +======================================== +Platforms which use the "gpiolib" implementors framework may choose to +configure a sysfs user interface to GPIOs. This is different from the +debugfs interface, since it provides control over GPIO direction and +value instead of just showing a gpio state summary. Plus, it could be +present on production systems without debugging support. + +Given approprate hardware documentation for the system, userspace could +know for example that GPIO #23 controls the write protect line used to +protect boot loader segments in flash memory. System upgrade procedures +may need to temporarily remove that protection, first importing a GPIO, +then changing its output state, then updating the code before re-enabling +the write protection. In normal use, GPIO #23 would never be touched, +and the kernel would have no need to know about it. + +Again depending on appropriate hardware documentation, on some systems +userspace GPIO can be used to determine system configuration data that +standard kernels won't know about. And for some tasks, simple userspace +GPIO drivers could be all that the system really needs. + +Note that standard kernel drivers exist for common "LEDs and Buttons" +GPIO tasks: "leds-gpio" and "gpio_keys", respectively. Use those +instead of talking directly to the GPIOs; they integrate with kernel +frameworks better than your userspace code could. + + +Paths in Sysfs +-------------- +There are three kinds of entry in /sys/class/gpio: + + - Control interfaces used to get userspace control over GPIOs; + + - GPIOs themselves; and + + - GPIO controllers ("gpio_chip" instances). + +That's in addition to standard files including the "device" symlink. + +The control interfaces are write-only: + + /sys/class/gpio/ + + "export" ... Userspace may ask the kernel to export control of + a GPIO to userspace by writing its number to this file. + + Example: "echo 19 > export" will create a "gpio19" node + for GPIO #19, if that's not requested by kernel code. + + "unexport" ... Reverses the effect of exporting to userspace. + + Example: "echo 19 > unexport" will remove a "gpio19" + node exported using the "export" file. + +GPIO signals have paths like /sys/class/gpio/gpio42/ (for GPIO #42) +and have the following read/write attributes: + + /sys/class/gpio/gpioN/ + + "direction" ... reads as either "in" or "out". This value may + normally be written. Writing as "out" defaults to + initializing the value as low. To ensure glitch free + operation, values "low" and "high" may be written to + configure the GPIO as an output with that initial value. + + Note that this attribute *will not exist* if the kernel + doesn't support changing the direction of a GPIO, or + it was exported by kernel code that didn't explicitly + allow userspace to reconfigure this GPIO's direction. + + "value" ... reads as either 0 (low) or 1 (high). If the GPIO + is configured as an output, this value may be written; + any nonzero value is treated as high. + +GPIO controllers have paths like /sys/class/gpio/chipchip42/ (for the +controller implementing GPIOs starting at #42) and have the following +read-only attributes: + + /sys/class/gpio/gpiochipN/ + + "base" ... same as N, the first GPIO managed by this chip + + "label" ... provided for diagnostics (not always unique) + + "ngpio" ... how many GPIOs this manges (N to N + ngpio - 1) + +Board documentation should in most cases cover what GPIOs are used for +what purposes. However, those numbers are not always stable; GPIOs on +a daughtercard might be different depending on the base board being used, +or other cards in the stack. In such cases, you may need to use the +gpiochip nodes (possibly in conjunction with schematics) to determine +the correct GPIO number to use for a given signal. + + +Exporting from Kernel code +-------------------------- +Kernel code can explicitly manage exports of GPIOs which have already been +requested using gpio_request(): + + /* export the GPIO to userspace */ + int gpio_export(unsigned gpio, bool direction_may_change); + + /* reverse gpio_export() */ + void gpio_unexport(); + +After a kernel driver requests a GPIO, it may only be made available in +the sysfs interface by gpio_export(). The driver can control whether the +signal direction may change. This helps drivers prevent userspace code +from accidentally clobbering important system state. + +This explicit exporting can help with debugging (by making some kinds +of experiments easier), or can provide an always-there interface that's +suitable for documenting as part of a board support package. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737 b/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737 index 8f446070e64..001d2e70bc1 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/dme1737 @@ -10,6 +10,10 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'sch311x' Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super-I/O config space Datasheet: http://www.nuhorizons.com/FeaturedProducts/Volume1/SMSC/311x.pdf + * SMSC SCH5027 + Prefix: 'sch5027' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e + Datasheet: Provided by SMSC upon request and under NDA Authors: Juerg Haefliger <juergh@gmail.com> @@ -22,34 +26,36 @@ Module Parameters and PWM output control functions. Using this parameter shouldn't be required since the BIOS usually takes care of this. - -Note that there is no need to use this parameter if the driver loads without -complaining. The driver will say so if it is necessary. +* probe_all_addr: bool Include non-standard LPC addresses 0x162e and 0x164e + when probing for ISA devices. This is required for the + following boards: + - VIA EPIA SN18000 Description ----------- This driver implements support for the hardware monitoring capabilities of the -SMSC DME1737 and Asus A8000 (which are the same) and SMSC SCH311x Super-I/O -chips. These chips feature monitoring of 3 temp sensors temp[1-3] (2 remote -diodes and 1 internal), 7 voltages in[0-6] (6 external and 1 internal) and up -to 6 fan speeds fan[1-6]. Additionally, the chips implement up to 5 PWM -outputs pwm[1-3,5-6] for controlling fan speeds both manually and +SMSC DME1737 and Asus A8000 (which are the same), SMSC SCH5027, and SMSC +SCH311x Super-I/O chips. These chips feature monitoring of 3 temp sensors +temp[1-3] (2 remote diodes and 1 internal), 7 voltages in[0-6] (6 external and +1 internal) and up to 6 fan speeds fan[1-6]. Additionally, the chips implement +up to 5 PWM outputs pwm[1-3,5-6] for controlling fan speeds both manually and automatically. -For the DME1737 and A8000, fan[1-2] and pwm[1-2] are always present. Fan[3-6] -and pwm[3,5-6] are optional features and their availability depends on the -configuration of the chip. The driver will detect which features are present -during initialization and create the sysfs attributes accordingly. +For the DME1737, A8000 and SCH5027, fan[1-2] and pwm[1-2] are always present. +Fan[3-6] and pwm[3,5-6] are optional features and their availability depends on +the configuration of the chip. The driver will detect which features are +present during initialization and create the sysfs attributes accordingly. For the SCH311x, fan[1-3] and pwm[1-3] are always present and fan[4-6] and pwm[5-6] don't exist. -The hardware monitoring features of the DME1737 and A8000 are only accessible -via SMBus, while the SCH311x only provides access via the ISA bus. The driver -will therefore register itself as an I2C client driver if it detects a DME1737 -or A8000 and as a platform driver if it detects a SCH311x chip. +The hardware monitoring features of the DME1737, A8000, and SCH5027 are only +accessible via SMBus, while the SCH311x only provides access via the ISA bus. +The driver will therefore register itself as an I2C client driver if it detects +a DME1737, A8000, or SCH5027 and as a platform driver if it detects a SCH311x +chip. Voltage Monitoring @@ -60,6 +66,7 @@ scaling resistors. The values returned by the driver therefore reflect true millivolts and don't need scaling. The voltage inputs are mapped as follows (the last column indicates the input ranges): +DME1737, A8000: in0: +5VTR (+5V standby) 0V - 6.64V in1: Vccp (processor core) 0V - 3V in2: VCC (internal +3.3V) 0V - 4.38V @@ -68,6 +75,24 @@ millivolts and don't need scaling. The voltage inputs are mapped as follows in5: VTR (+3.3V standby) 0V - 4.38V in6: Vbat (+3.0V) 0V - 4.38V +SCH311x: + in0: +2.5V 0V - 6.64V + in1: Vccp (processor core) 0V - 2V + in2: VCC (internal +3.3V) 0V - 4.38V + in3: +5V 0V - 6.64V + in4: +12V 0V - 16V + in5: VTR (+3.3V standby) 0V - 4.38V + in6: Vbat (+3.0V) 0V - 4.38V + +SCH5027: + in0: +5VTR (+5V standby) 0V - 6.64V + in1: Vccp (processor core) 0V - 3V + in2: VCC (internal +3.3V) 0V - 4.38V + in3: V2_IN 0V - 1.5V + in4: V1_IN 0V - 1.5V + in5: VTR (+3.3V standby) 0V - 4.38V + in6: Vbat (+3.0V) 0V - 4.38V + Each voltage input has associated min and max limits which trigger an alarm when crossed. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ibmaem b/Documentation/hwmon/ibmaem index 2fefaf582a4..e98bdfea346 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/ibmaem +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ibmaem @@ -1,8 +1,11 @@ Kernel driver ibmaem ====================== +This driver talks to the IBM Systems Director Active Energy Manager, known +henceforth as AEM. + Supported systems: - * Any recent IBM System X server with Active Energy Manager support. + * Any recent IBM System X server with AEM support. This includes the x3350, x3550, x3650, x3655, x3755, x3850 M2, x3950 M2, and certain HS2x/LS2x/QS2x blades. The IPMI host interface driver ("ipmi-si") needs to be loaded for this driver to do anything. @@ -14,24 +17,22 @@ Author: Darrick J. Wong Description ----------- -This driver implements sensor reading support for the energy and power -meters available on various IBM System X hardware through the BMC. All -sensor banks will be exported as platform devices; this driver can talk -to both v1 and v2 interfaces. This driver is completely separate from the -older ibmpex driver. +This driver implements sensor reading support for the energy and power meters +available on various IBM System X hardware through the BMC. All sensor banks +will be exported as platform devices; this driver can talk to both v1 and v2 +interfaces. This driver is completely separate from the older ibmpex driver. -The v1 AEM interface has a simple set of features to monitor energy use. -There is a register that displays an estimate of raw energy consumption -since the last BMC reset, and a power sensor that returns average power -use over a configurable interval. +The v1 AEM interface has a simple set of features to monitor energy use. There +is a register that displays an estimate of raw energy consumption since the +last BMC reset, and a power sensor that returns average power use over a +configurable interval. -The v2 AEM interface is a bit more sophisticated, being able to present -a wider range of energy and power use registers, the power cap as -set by the AEM software, and temperature sensors. +The v2 AEM interface is a bit more sophisticated, being able to present a wider +range of energy and power use registers, the power cap as set by the AEM +software, and temperature sensors. Special Features ---------------- -The "power_cap" value displays the current system power cap, as set by -the Active Energy Manager software. Setting the power cap from the host -is not currently supported. +The "power_cap" value displays the current system power cap, as set by the AEM +software. Setting the power cap from the host is not currently supported. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/it87 b/Documentation/hwmon/it87 index f4ce1fdbeff..3496b7020e7 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/it87 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/it87 @@ -6,12 +6,14 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'it87' Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports) Datasheet: Publicly available at the ITE website - http://www.ite.com.tw/ + http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8705F_V.0.4.1.pdf * IT8712F Prefix: 'it8712' Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports) Datasheet: Publicly available at the ITE website - http://www.ite.com.tw/ + http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8712F_V0.9.1.pdf + http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/Errata%20V0.1%20for%20IT8712F%20V0.9.1.pdf + http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8712F_V0.9.3.pdf * IT8716F/IT8726F Prefix: 'it8716' Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports) @@ -90,14 +92,13 @@ upper VID bits share their pins with voltage inputs (in5 and in6) so you can't have both on a given board. The IT8716F, IT8718F and later IT8712F revisions have support for -2 additional fans. They are supported by the driver for the IT8716F and -IT8718F but not for the IT8712F +2 additional fans. The additional fans are supported by the driver. The IT8716F and IT8718F, and late IT8712F and IT8705F also have optional 16-bit tachometer counters for fans 1 to 3. This is better (no more fan clock divider mess) but not compatible with the older chips and -revisions. For now, the driver only uses the 16-bit mode on the -IT8716F and IT8718F. +revisions. The 16-bit tachometer mode is enabled by the driver when one +of the above chips is detected. The IT8726F is just bit enhanced IT8716F with additional hardware for AMD power sequencing. Therefore the chip will appear as IT8716F diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 index 9549237530c..6d41db7f17f 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 @@ -96,11 +96,6 @@ initial testing of the ADM1027 it was 1.00 degC steps. Analog Devices has confirmed this "bug". The ADT7463 is reported to work as described in the documentation. The current lm85 driver does not show the offset register. -The ADT7463 has a THERM asserted counter. This counter has a 22.76ms -resolution and a range of 5.8 seconds. The driver implements a 32-bit -accumulator of the counter value to extend the range to over a year. The -counter will stay at it's max value until read. - See the vendor datasheets for more information. There is application note from National (AN-1260) with some additional information about the LM85. The Analog Devices datasheet is very detailed and describes a procedure for @@ -206,13 +201,15 @@ Configuration choices: The National LM85's have two vendor specific configuration features. Tach. mode and Spinup Control. For more details on these, -see the LM85 datasheet or Application Note AN-1260. +see the LM85 datasheet or Application Note AN-1260. These features +are not currently supported by the lm85 driver. The Analog Devices ADM1027 has several vendor specific enhancements. The number of pulses-per-rev of the fans can be set, Tach monitoring can be optimized for PWM operation, and an offset can be applied to the temperatures to compensate for systemic errors in the -measurements. +measurements. These features are not currently supported by the lm85 +driver. In addition to the ADM1027 features, the ADT7463 also has Tmin control and THERM asserted counts. Automatic Tmin control acts to adjust the diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf index 880a59f53da..6ee36dbafd6 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627hf @@ -40,10 +40,6 @@ Module Parameters (default is 1) Use 'init=0' to bypass initializing the chip. Try this if your computer crashes when you load the module. -* reset: int - (default is 0) - The driver used to reset the chip on load, but does no more. Use - 'reset=1' to restore the old behavior. Report if you need to do this. Description ----------- diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d index f153b2f6d62..a67d3b7a709 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d @@ -22,6 +22,7 @@ Credits: Additional contributors: Sven Anders <anders@anduras.de> + Marc Hulsman <m.hulsman@tudelft.nl> Module Parameters ----------------- @@ -67,9 +68,8 @@ on until the temperature falls below the Hysteresis value. Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan -readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4, 8 for fan 1/2/3 -and 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 or 128 for fan 4/5) to give the readings more -range or accuracy. +readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, +32, 64 or 128 for all fans) to give the readings more range or accuracy. Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in millivolts. An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients b/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9a45f9bb6a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients @@ -0,0 +1,281 @@ +Upgrading I2C Drivers to the new 2.6 Driver Model +================================================= + +Ben Dooks <ben-linux@fluff.org> + +Introduction +------------ + +This guide outlines how to alter existing Linux 2.6 client drivers from +the old to the new new binding methods. + + +Example old-style driver +------------------------ + + +struct example_state { + struct i2c_client client; + .... +}; + +static struct i2c_driver example_driver; + +static unsigned short ignore[] = { I2C_CLIENT_END }; +static unsigned short normal_addr[] = { OUR_ADDR, I2C_CLIENT_END }; + +I2C_CLIENT_INSMOD; + +static int example_attach(struct i2c_adapter *adap, int addr, int kind) +{ + struct example_state *state; + struct device *dev = &adap->dev; /* to use for dev_ reports */ + int ret; + + state = kzalloc(sizeof(struct example_state), GFP_KERNEL); + if (state == NULL) { + dev_err(dev, "failed to create our state\n"); + return -ENOMEM; + } + + example->client.addr = addr; + example->client.flags = 0; + example->client.adapter = adap; + + i2c_set_clientdata(&state->i2c_client, state); + strlcpy(client->i2c_client.name, "example", I2C_NAME_SIZE); + + ret = i2c_attach_client(&state->i2c_client); + if (ret < 0) { + dev_err(dev, "failed to attach client\n"); + kfree(state); + return ret; + } + + dev = &state->i2c_client.dev; + + /* rest of the initialisation goes here. */ + + dev_info(dev, "example client created\n"); + + return 0; +} + +static int __devexit example_detach(struct i2c_client *client) +{ + struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client); + + i2c_detach_client(client); + kfree(state); + return 0; +} + +static int example_attach_adapter(struct i2c_adapter *adap) +{ + return i2c_probe(adap, &addr_data, example_attach); +} + +static struct i2c_driver example_driver = { + .driver = { + .owner = THIS_MODULE, + .name = "example", + }, + .attach_adapter = example_attach_adapter, + .detach_client = __devexit_p(example_detach), + .suspend = example_suspend, + .resume = example_resume, +}; + + +Updating the client +------------------- + +The new style binding model will check against a list of supported +devices and their associated address supplied by the code registering +the busses. This means that the driver .attach_adapter and +.detach_adapter methods can be removed, along with the addr_data, +as follows: + +- static struct i2c_driver example_driver; + +- static unsigned short ignore[] = { I2C_CLIENT_END }; +- static unsigned short normal_addr[] = { OUR_ADDR, I2C_CLIENT_END }; + +- I2C_CLIENT_INSMOD; + +- static int example_attach_adapter(struct i2c_adapter *adap) +- { +- return i2c_probe(adap, &addr_data, example_attach); +- } + + static struct i2c_driver example_driver = { +- .attach_adapter = example_attach_adapter, +- .detach_client = __devexit_p(example_detach), + } + +Add the probe and remove methods to the i2c_driver, as so: + + static struct i2c_driver example_driver = { ++ .probe = example_probe, ++ .remove = __devexit_p(example_remove), + } + +Change the example_attach method to accept the new parameters +which include the i2c_client that it will be working with: + +- static int example_attach(struct i2c_adapter *adap, int addr, int kind) ++ static int example_probe(struct i2c_client *client, ++ const struct i2c_device_id *id) + +Change the name of example_attach to example_probe to align it with the +i2c_driver entry names. The rest of the probe routine will now need to be +changed as the i2c_client has already been setup for use. + +The necessary client fields have already been setup before +the probe function is called, so the following client setup +can be removed: + +- example->client.addr = addr; +- example->client.flags = 0; +- example->client.adapter = adap; +- +- strlcpy(client->i2c_client.name, "example", I2C_NAME_SIZE); + +The i2c_set_clientdata is now: + +- i2c_set_clientdata(&state->client, state); ++ i2c_set_clientdata(client, state); + +The call to i2c_attach_client is no longer needed, if the probe +routine exits successfully, then the driver will be automatically +attached by the core. Change the probe routine as so: + +- ret = i2c_attach_client(&state->i2c_client); +- if (ret < 0) { +- dev_err(dev, "failed to attach client\n"); +- kfree(state); +- return ret; +- } + + +Remove the storage of 'struct i2c_client' from the 'struct example_state' +as we are provided with the i2c_client in our example_probe. Instead we +store a pointer to it for when it is needed. + +struct example_state { +- struct i2c_client client; ++ struct i2c_client *client; + +the new i2c client as so: + +- struct device *dev = &adap->dev; /* to use for dev_ reports */ ++ struct device *dev = &i2c_client->dev; /* to use for dev_ reports */ + +And remove the change after our client is attached, as the driver no +longer needs to register a new client structure with the core: + +- dev = &state->i2c_client.dev; + +In the probe routine, ensure that the new state has the client stored +in it: + +static int example_probe(struct i2c_client *i2c_client, + const struct i2c_device_id *id) +{ + struct example_state *state; + struct device *dev = &i2c_client->dev; + int ret; + + state = kzalloc(sizeof(struct example_state), GFP_KERNEL); + if (state == NULL) { + dev_err(dev, "failed to create our state\n"); + return -ENOMEM; + } + ++ state->client = i2c_client; + +Update the detach method, by changing the name to _remove and +to delete the i2c_detach_client call. It is possible that you +can also remove the ret variable as it is not not needed for +any of the core functions. + +- static int __devexit example_detach(struct i2c_client *client) ++ static int __devexit example_remove(struct i2c_client *client) +{ + struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client); + +- i2c_detach_client(client); + +And finally ensure that we have the correct ID table for the i2c-core +and other utilities: + ++ struct i2c_device_id example_idtable[] = { ++ { "example", 0 }, ++ { } ++}; ++ ++MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(i2c, example_idtable); + +static struct i2c_driver example_driver = { + .driver = { + .owner = THIS_MODULE, + .name = "example", + }, ++ .id_table = example_ids, + + +Our driver should now look like this: + +struct example_state { + struct i2c_client *client; + .... +}; + +static int example_probe(struct i2c_client *client, + const struct i2c_device_id *id) +{ + struct example_state *state; + struct device *dev = &client->dev; + + state = kzalloc(sizeof(struct example_state), GFP_KERNEL); + if (state == NULL) { + dev_err(dev, "failed to create our state\n"); + return -ENOMEM; + } + + state->client = client; + i2c_set_clientdata(client, state); + + /* rest of the initialisation goes here. */ + + dev_info(dev, "example client created\n"); + + return 0; +} + +static int __devexit example_remove(struct i2c_client *client) +{ + struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client); + + kfree(state); + return 0; +} + +static struct i2c_device_id example_idtable[] = { + { "example", 0 }, + { } +}; + +MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(i2c, example_idtable); + +static struct i2c_driver example_driver = { + .driver = { + .owner = THIS_MODULE, + .name = "example", + }, + .id_table = example_idtable, + .probe = example_probe, + .remove = __devexit_p(example_remove), + .suspend = example_suspend, + .resume = example_resume, +}; diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/Makefile b/Documentation/ia64/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b75db69ec48 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ia64/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built. +obj- := dummy.o + +# List of programs to build +hostprogs-y := aliasing-test + +# Tell kbuild to always build the programs +always := $(hostprogs-y) diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt b/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt index bec9d815da3..914d07f4926 100644 --- a/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt +++ b/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt @@ -50,9 +50,9 @@ Note: For step 2, please make sure that host page size == TARGET_PAGE_SIZE of qe /usr/local/bin/qemu-system-ia64 -smp xx -m 512 -hda $your_image (xx is the number of virtual processors for the guest, now the maximum value is 4) -5. Known possibile issue on some platforms with old Firmware. +5. Known possible issue on some platforms with old Firmware. -If meet strange host crashe issues, try to solve it through either of the following ways: +In the event of strange host crash issues, try to solve it through either of the following ways: (1): Upgrade your Firmware to the latest one. @@ -65,8 +65,8 @@ index 0b53344..f02b0f7 100644 mov ar.pfs = loc1 mov rp = loc0 ;; -- srlz.d // seralize restoration of psr.l -+ srlz.i // seralize restoration of psr.l +- srlz.d // serialize restoration of psr.l ++ srlz.i // serialize restoration of psr.l + ;; br.ret.sptk.many b0 END(ia64_pal_call_static) diff --git a/Documentation/input/cs461x.txt b/Documentation/input/cs461x.txt index afe0d6543e0..202e9dbacec 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/cs461x.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/cs461x.txt @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ The driver works with ALSA drivers simultaneously. For example, the xracer uses joystick as input device and PCM device as sound output in one time. There are no sound or input collisions detected. The source code have comments about them; but I've found the joystick can be initialized -separately of ALSA modules. So, you canm use only one joystick driver +separately of ALSA modules. So, you can use only one joystick driver without ALSA drivers. The ALSA drivers are not needed to compile or run this driver. diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt index 3bb5f466a90..1c6b545635a 100644 --- a/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt +++ b/Documentation/ioctl-number.txt @@ -105,7 +105,6 @@ Code Seq# Include File Comments 'T' all linux/soundcard.h conflict! 'T' all asm-i386/ioctls.h conflict! 'U' 00-EF linux/drivers/usb/usb.h -'U' F0-FF drivers/usb/auerswald.c 'V' all linux/vt.h 'W' 00-1F linux/watchdog.h conflict! 'W' 00-1F linux/wanrouter.h conflict! diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-decoding.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-decoding.txt index bfdf7f3ee4f..e35efb0cec2 100644 --- a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-decoding.txt +++ b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-decoding.txt @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ To decode a hex IOCTL code: -Most architecures use this generic format, but check +Most architectures use this generic format, but check include/ARCH/ioctl.h for specifics, e.g. powerpc uses 3 bits to encode read/write and 13 bits for size. @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ uses 3 bits to encode read/write and 13 bits for size. 7-0 function # - So for example 0x82187201 is a read with arg length of 0x218, +So for example 0x82187201 is a read with arg length of 0x218, character 'r' function 1. Grepping the source reveals this is: #define VFAT_IOCTL_READDIR_BOTH _IOR('r', 1, struct dirent [2]) diff --git a/Documentation/iostats.txt b/Documentation/iostats.txt index 5925c3cd030..59a69ec67c4 100644 --- a/Documentation/iostats.txt +++ b/Documentation/iostats.txt @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ disk and partition statistics are consistent again. Since we still don't keep record of the partition-relative address, an operation is attributed to the partition which contains the first sector of the request after the eventual merges. As requests can be merged across partition, this could lead -to some (probably insignificant) innacuracy. +to some (probably insignificant) inaccuracy. Additional notes ---------------- diff --git a/Documentation/isdn/README.mISDN b/Documentation/isdn/README.mISDN new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cd8bf920e77 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/isdn/README.mISDN @@ -0,0 +1,6 @@ +mISDN is a new modular ISDN driver, in the long term it should replace +the old I4L driver architecture for passiv ISDN cards. +It was designed to allow a broad range of applications and interfaces +but only have the basic function in kernel, the interface to the user +space is based on sockets with a own address family AF_ISDN. + diff --git a/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO b/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO index 488c77fa3aa..0775cf4798b 100644 --- a/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO +++ b/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO @@ -11,14 +11,14 @@ for non English (read: Japanese) speakers and is not intended as a fork. So if you have any comments or updates for this file, please try to update the original English file first. -Last Updated: 2007/11/16 +Last Updated: 2008/08/21 ================================== ã“ã‚Œã¯ã€ -linux-2.6.24/Documentation/HOWTO +linux-2.6.27/Documentation/HOWTO ã®å’Œè¨³ã§ã™ã€‚ 翻訳団体： JF プãƒã‚¸ã‚§ã‚¯ãƒˆ < http://www.linux.or.jp/JF/ > -翻訳日： 2007/11/10 +翻訳日： 2008/8/5 翻訳者： Tsugikazu Shibata <tshibata at ab dot jp dot nec dot com> æ ¡æ£è€…： æ¾å€‰ã•ã‚“ <nbh--mats at nifty dot com> å°æž— é›…å…¸ã•ã‚“ (Masanori Kobayasi) <zap03216 at nifty dot ne dot jp> @@ -287,13 +287,15 @@ Linux カーãƒãƒ«ã®é–‹ç™ºãƒ—ãƒã‚»ã‚¹ã¯ç¾åœ¨å¹¾ã¤ã‹ã®ç•°ãªã‚‹ãƒ¡ã‚¤ãƒ³ã‚ ã«å®‰å®šã—ãŸçŠ¶æ…‹ã«ã‚ã‚‹ã¨åˆ¤æ–ã—ãŸã¨ãã«ãƒªãƒªãƒ¼ã‚¹ã•ã‚Œã¾ã™ã€‚目標ã¯æ¯Žé€±æ–° ã—ã„ -rc カーãƒãƒ«ã‚’リリースã™ã‚‹ã“ã¨ã§ã™ã€‚ - - 以下㮠URL ã§å„ -rc リリースã«å˜åœ¨ã™ã‚‹æ—¢çŸ¥ã®å¾Œæˆ»ã‚Šå•é¡Œã®ãƒªã‚¹ãƒˆ - ãŒè¿½è·¡ã•ã‚Œã¾ã™- - http://kernelnewbies.org/known_regressions - - ã“ã®ãƒ—ãƒã‚»ã‚¹ã¯ã‚«ãƒ¼ãƒãƒ«ãŒ 「準備ãŒã§ããŸã€ã¨è€ƒãˆã‚‰ã‚Œã‚‹ã¾ã§ç¶™ç¶šã—ã¾ ã™ã€‚ã“ã®ãƒ—ãƒã‚»ã‚¹ã¯ã ã„ãŸã„ 6週間継続ã—ã¾ã™ã€‚ + - å„リリースã§ã®æ—¢çŸ¥ã®å¾Œæˆ»ã‚Šå•é¡Œ(regression: ã“ã®ãƒªãƒªãƒ¼ã‚¹ã®ä¸ã§æ–°è¦ + ã«ä½œã‚Šè¾¼ã¾ã‚ŒãŸå•é¡Œã‚’指ã™) ã¯ãã®éƒ½åº¦ Linux-kernel メーリングリスト + ã«æŠ•ç¨¿ã•ã‚Œã¾ã™ã€‚ゴールã¨ã—ã¦ã¯ã€ã‚«ãƒ¼ãƒãƒ«ãŒ 「準備ãŒã§ããŸã€ã¨å®£è¨€ + ã™ã‚‹å‰ã«ã“ã®ãƒªã‚¹ãƒˆã®é•·ã•ã‚’ゼãƒã«æ¸›ã‚‰ã™ã“ã¨ã§ã™ãŒã€ç¾å®Ÿã«ã¯ã€æ•°å€‹ã® + 後戻りå•é¡ŒãŒãƒªãƒªãƒ¼ã‚¹æ™‚ã«ãŸã³ãŸã³æ®‹ã£ã¦ã—ã¾ã„ã¾ã™ã€‚ + Andrew Morton ㌠Linux-kernel メーリングリストã«ã‚«ãƒ¼ãƒãƒ«ãƒªãƒªãƒ¼ã‚¹ã«ã¤ã„ ã¦æ›¸ã„ãŸã“ã¨ã‚’ã“ã“ã§è¨€ã£ã¦ãŠãã“ã¨ã¯ä¾¡å€¤ãŒã‚ã‚Šã¾ã™- 「カーãƒãƒ«ãŒã„ã¤ãƒªãƒªãƒ¼ã‚¹ã•ã‚Œã‚‹ã‹ã¯èª°ã‚‚知りã¾ã›ã‚“。ãªãœãªã‚‰ã€ã“ã‚Œã¯ç¾ @@ -303,18 +305,20 @@ Andrew Morton ㌠Linux-kernel メーリングリストã«ã‚«ãƒ¼ãƒãƒ«ãƒªãƒªãƒ¼ã 2.6.x.y -stable カーãƒãƒ«ãƒ„リー --------------------------- -ãƒãƒ¼ã‚¸ãƒ§ãƒ³ã«4ã¤ç›®ã®æ•°å—ãŒã¤ã„ãŸã‚«ãƒ¼ãƒãƒ«ã¯ -stable カーãƒãƒ«ã§ã™ã€‚ã“れ㫠-ã¯ã€2.6.x カーãƒãƒ«ã§è¦‹ã¤ã‹ã£ãŸã‚»ã‚ュリティå•é¡Œã‚„é‡å¤§ãªå¾Œæˆ»ã‚Šã«å¯¾ã™ã‚‹æ¯” -較的å°ã•ã„é‡è¦ãªä¿®æ£ãŒå«ã¾ã‚Œã¾ã™ã€‚ +ãƒãƒ¼ã‚¸ãƒ§ãƒ³ç•ªå·ãŒ4ã¤ã®æ•°å—ã«åˆ†ã‹ã‚Œã¦ã„るカーãƒãƒ«ã¯ -stable カーãƒãƒ«ã§ã™ã€‚ +ã“ã‚Œã«ã¯ã€2.6.x カーãƒãƒ«ã§è¦‹ã¤ã‹ã£ãŸã‚»ã‚ュリティå•é¡Œã‚„é‡å¤§ãªå¾Œæˆ»ã‚Šã«å¯¾ +ã™ã‚‹æ¯”較的å°ã•ã„é‡è¦ãªä¿®æ£ãŒå«ã¾ã‚Œã¾ã™ã€‚ ã“ã‚Œã¯ã€é–‹ç™º/実験的ãƒãƒ¼ã‚¸ãƒ§ãƒ³ã®ãƒ†ã‚¹ãƒˆã«å”力ã™ã‚‹ã“ã¨ã«èˆˆå‘³ãŒç„¡ã〠最新ã®å®‰å®šã—ãŸã‚«ãƒ¼ãƒãƒ«ã‚’使ã„ãŸã„ユーザã«æŽ¨å¥¨ã™ã‚‹ãƒ–ランãƒã§ã™ã€‚ -ã‚‚ã—ã€2.6.x.y カーãƒãƒ«ãŒå˜åœ¨ã—ãªã„å ´åˆã«ã¯ã€ç•ªå·ãŒä¸€ç•ªå¤§ãã„ 2.6.x -ãŒæœ€æ–°ã®å®‰å®šç‰ˆã‚«ãƒ¼ãƒãƒ«ã§ã™ã€‚ +ã‚‚ã—ã€2.6.x.y カーãƒãƒ«ãŒå˜åœ¨ã—ãªã„å ´åˆã«ã¯ã€ç•ªå·ãŒä¸€ç•ªå¤§ãã„ 2.6.x ㌠+最新ã®å®‰å®šç‰ˆã‚«ãƒ¼ãƒãƒ«ã§ã™ã€‚ -2.6.x.y 㯠"stable" ãƒãƒ¼ãƒ <stable@kernel.org> ã§ãƒ¡ãƒ³ãƒ†ã•ã‚Œã¦ãŠã‚Šã€ã -ã„ãŸã„隔週ã§ãƒªãƒªãƒ¼ã‚¹ã•ã‚Œã¦ã„ã¾ã™ã€‚ +2.6.x.y 㯠"stable" ãƒãƒ¼ãƒ <stable@kernel.org> ã§ãƒ¡ãƒ³ãƒ†ã•ã‚Œã¦ãŠã‚Šã€å¿… +è¦ã«å¿œã˜ã¦ãƒªãƒªãƒ¼ã‚¹ã•ã‚Œã¾ã™ã€‚通常ã®ãƒªãƒªãƒ¼ã‚¹æœŸé–“㯠2週間毎ã§ã™ãŒã€å·®ã—迫㣠+ãŸå•é¡ŒãŒãªã‘ã‚Œã°ã‚‚ã†å°‘ã—é•·ããªã‚‹ã“ã¨ã‚‚ã‚ã‚Šã¾ã™ã€‚ã‚»ã‚ュリティ関連ã®å•é¡Œ +ã®å ´åˆã¯ã“ã‚Œã«å¯¾ã—ã¦ã ã„ãŸã„ã®å ´åˆã€ã™ãã«ãƒªãƒªãƒ¼ã‚¹ãŒã•ã‚Œã¾ã™ã€‚ カーãƒãƒ«ãƒ„リーã«å…¥ã£ã¦ã„ã‚‹ã€Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt ファ イルã«ã¯ã©ã®ã‚ˆã†ãªç¨®é¡žã®å¤‰æ›´ãŒ -stable ツリーã«å—ã‘入れå¯èƒ½ã‹ã€ã¾ãŸãƒª @@ -341,7 +345,9 @@ linux-kernel メーリングリストã§åŽé›†ã•ã‚ŒãŸå¤šæ•°ã®ãƒ‘ッãƒã¨åŒæ メインラインã¸å…¥ã‚Œã‚‹ã‚ˆã†ã« Linus ã«ãƒ—ッシュã—ã¾ã™ã€‚ メインカーãƒãƒ«ãƒ„リーã«å«ã‚ã‚‹ãŸã‚ã« Linus ã«é€ã‚‹å‰ã«ã€ã™ã¹ã¦ã®æ–°ã—ã„パッ -ãƒãŒ -mm ツリーã§ãƒ†ã‚¹ãƒˆã•ã‚Œã‚‹ã“ã¨ãŒå¼·ã推奨ã•ã‚Œã¾ã™ã€‚ +ãƒãŒ -mm ツリーã§ãƒ†ã‚¹ãƒˆã•ã‚Œã‚‹ã“ã¨ãŒå¼·ã推奨ã•ã‚Œã¦ã„ã¾ã™ã€‚マージウィン +ドウãŒé–‹ãå‰ã« -mm ツリーã«ç¾ã‚Œãªã‹ã£ãŸãƒ‘ッãƒã¯ãƒ¡ã‚¤ãƒ³ãƒ©ã‚¤ãƒ³ã«ãƒžãƒ¼ã‚¸ã• +れるã“ã¨ã¯å›°é›£ã«ãªã‚Šã¾ã™ã€‚ ã“れらã®ã‚«ãƒ¼ãƒãƒ«ã¯å®‰å®šã—ã¦å‹•ä½œã™ã¹ãシステムã¨ã—ã¦ä½¿ã†ã®ã«ã¯é©åˆ‡ã§ã¯ã‚ ã‚Šã¾ã›ã‚“ã—ã€ã‚«ãƒ¼ãƒãƒ«ãƒ–ランãƒã®ä¸ã§ã‚‚ã‚‚ã£ã¨ã‚‚動作ã«ãƒªã‚¹ã‚¯ãŒé«˜ã„ã‚‚ã®ã§ã™ã€‚ @@ -395,13 +401,15 @@ linux-kernel メーリングリストã§åŽé›†ã•ã‚ŒãŸå¤šæ•°ã®ãƒ‘ッãƒã¨åŒæ - pcmcia, Dominik Brodowski <linux@dominikbrodowski.net> git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/brodo/pcmcia-2.6.git - - SCSI, James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@SteelEye.com> + - SCSI, James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@hansenpartnership.com> git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jejb/scsi-misc-2.6.git + - x86, Ingo Molnar <mingo@elte.hu> + git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/x86/linux-2.6-x86.git + quilt ツリー- - - USB, PCI ドライãƒã‚³ã‚¢ã¨ I2C, Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de> + - USB, ドライãƒã‚³ã‚¢ã¨ I2C, Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de> kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/gregkh/gregkh-2.6/ - - x86-64 㨠i386 ã®ä»²é–“ Andi Kleen <ak@suse.de> ãã®ä»–ã®ã‚«ãƒ¼ãƒãƒ«ãƒ„リー㯠http://git.kernel.org/ 㨠MAINTAINERS ファ イルã«ä¸€è¦§è¡¨ãŒã‚ã‚Šã¾ã™ã€‚ @@ -412,13 +420,32 @@ linux-kernel メーリングリストã§åŽé›†ã•ã‚ŒãŸå¤šæ•°ã®ãƒ‘ッãƒã¨åŒæ bugzilla.kernel.org 㯠Linux カーãƒãƒ«é–‹ç™ºè€…ãŒã‚«ãƒ¼ãƒãƒ«ã®ãƒã‚°ã‚’追跡ã™ã‚‹ å ´æ‰€ã§ã™ã€‚ユーザã¯è¦‹ã¤ã‘ãŸãƒã‚°ã®å…¨ã¦ã‚’ã“ã®ãƒ„ールã§å ±å‘Šã™ã¹ãã§ã™ã€‚ ã©ã† kernel bugzilla を使ã†ã‹ã®è©³ç´°ã¯ã€ä»¥ä¸‹ã‚’å‚ç…§ã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„- - http://test.kernel.org/bugzilla/faq.html - + http://bugzilla.kernel.org/page.cgi?id=faq.html メインカーãƒãƒ«ã‚½ãƒ¼ã‚¹ãƒ‡ã‚£ãƒ¬ã‚¯ãƒˆãƒªã«ã‚るファイル REPORTING-BUGS ã¯ã‚«ãƒ¼ãƒ ルãƒã‚°ã‚‰ã—ã„ã‚‚ã®ã«ã¤ã„ã¦ã©ã†ãƒ¬ãƒãƒ¼ãƒˆã™ã‚‹ã‹ã®è‰¯ã„テンプレートã§ã‚ã‚Šã€å• é¡Œã®è¿½è·¡ã‚’助ã‘ã‚‹ãŸã‚ã«ã‚«ãƒ¼ãƒãƒ«é–‹ç™ºè€…ã«ã¨ã£ã¦ã©ã‚“ãªæƒ…å ±ãŒå¿…è¦ãªã®ã‹ã®è©³ ç´°ãŒæ›¸ã‹ã‚Œã¦ã„ã¾ã™ã€‚ +ãƒã‚°ãƒ¬ãƒãƒ¼ãƒˆã®ç®¡ç† +------------------- + +ã‚ãªãŸã®ãƒãƒƒã‚ングã®ã‚¹ã‚ルを訓練ã™ã‚‹æœ€é«˜ã®æ–¹æ³•ã®ã²ã¨ã¤ã«ã€ä»–人ãŒãƒ¬ãƒãƒ¼ +トã—ãŸãƒã‚°ã‚’ä¿®æ£ã™ã‚‹ã“ã¨ãŒã‚ã‚Šã¾ã™ã€‚ã‚ãªãŸãŒã‚«ãƒ¼ãƒãƒ«ã‚’より安定化ã•ã›ã‚‹ +ã“ã«å¯„与ã™ã‚‹ã¨ã„ã†ã“ã¨ã ã‘ã§ãªãã€ã‚ãªãŸã¯ ç¾å®Ÿã®å•é¡Œã‚’ä¿®æ£ã™ã‚‹ã“ã¨ã‚’ +å¦ã³ã€è‡ªåˆ†ã®ã‚¹ã‚ルも強化ã§ãã€ã¾ãŸä»–ã®é–‹ç™ºè€…ãŒã‚ãªãŸã®å˜åœ¨ã«æ°—ãŒã¤ã +ã¾ã™ã€‚ãƒã‚°ã‚’ä¿®æ£ã™ã‚‹ã“ã¨ã¯ã€å¤šãã®é–‹ç™ºè€…ã®ä¸ã‹ã‚‰è‡ªåˆ†ãŒåŠŸç¸¾ã‚’ã‚ã’る最善 +ã®é“ã§ã™ã€ãªãœãªã‚‰å¤šãã®äººã¯ä»–人ã®ãƒã‚°ã®ä¿®æ£ã«æ™‚間を浪費ã™ã‚‹ã“ã¨ã‚’好㾠+ãªã„ã‹ã‚‰ã§ã™ã€‚ + +ã™ã§ã«ãƒ¬ãƒãƒ¼ãƒˆã•ã‚ŒãŸãƒã‚°ã®ãŸã‚ã«ä»•äº‹ã‚’ã™ã‚‹ãŸã‚ã«ã¯ã€ +http://bugzilla.kernel.org ã«è¡Œã£ã¦ãã ã•ã„。もã—今後ã®ãƒã‚°ãƒ¬ãƒãƒ¼ãƒˆã« +ã¤ã„ã¦ã‚¢ãƒ‰ãƒã‚¤ã‚¹ã‚’å—ã‘ãŸã„ã®ã§ã‚ã‚Œã°ã€bugme-new メーリングリスト(æ–°ã— +ã„ãƒã‚°ãƒ¬ãƒãƒ¼ãƒˆã ã‘ãŒã“ã“ã«ãƒ¡ãƒ¼ãƒ«ã•ã‚Œã‚‹) ã¾ãŸã¯ bugme-janitor メーリン +グリスト(bugzilla ã®å¤‰æ›´æ¯Žã«ã“ã“ã«ãƒ¡ãƒ¼ãƒ«ã•ã‚Œã‚‹)ã‚’è³¼èªã§ãã¾ã™ã€‚ + + http://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-new + http://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-janitors + メーリングリスト ------------- diff --git a/Documentation/ja_JP/SubmitChecklist b/Documentation/ja_JP/SubmitChecklist new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6c42e071d72 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ja_JP/SubmitChecklist @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +NOTE: +This is a version of Documentation/SubmitChecklist into Japanese. +This document is maintained by Takenori Nagano <t-nagano@ah.jp.nec.com> +and the JF Project team <http://www.linux.or.jp/JF/>. +If you find any difference between this document and the original file +or a problem with the translation, +please contact the maintainer of this file or JF project. + +Please also note that the purpose of this file is to be easier to read +for non English (read: Japanese) speakers and is not intended as a +fork. So if you have any comments or updates of this file, please try +to update the original English file first. + +Last Updated: 2008/07/14 +================================== +ã“ã‚Œã¯ã€ +linux-2.6.26/Documentation/SubmitChecklist ã®å’Œè¨³ã§ã™ã€‚ + +翻訳団体： JF プãƒã‚¸ã‚§ã‚¯ãƒˆ < http://www.linux.or.jp/JF/ > +翻訳日： 2008/07/14 +翻訳者： Takenori Nagano <t-nagano at ah dot jp dot nec dot com> +æ ¡æ£è€…： Masanori Kobayashi ã•ã‚“ <zap03216 at nifty dot ne dot jp> +================================== + + +Linux カーãƒãƒ«ãƒ‘ッãƒæŠ•ç¨¿è€…å‘ã‘ãƒã‚§ãƒƒã‚¯ãƒªã‚¹ãƒˆ +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +本書ã§ã¯ã€ãƒ‘ッãƒã‚’ã‚ˆã‚Šç´ æ—©ãå–り込んã§ã‚‚らã„ãŸã„開発者ãŒå®Ÿè·µã™ã¹ã基本的ãªäº‹æŸ„ +ã‚’ã„ãã¤ã‹ç´¹ä»‹ã—ã¾ã™ã€‚ã“ã“ã«ã‚ã‚‹å…¨ã¦ã®äº‹æŸ„ã¯ã€Documentation/SubmittingPatches +ãªã©ã®Linuxカーãƒãƒ«ãƒ‘ッãƒæŠ•ç¨¿ã«éš›ã—ã¦ã®å¿ƒå¾—を補足ã™ã‚‹ã‚‚ã®ã§ã™ã€‚ + + 1: 妥当ãªCONFIGオプションや変更ã•ã‚ŒãŸCONFIGオプションã€ã¤ã¾ã‚Š =y, =m, =n + å…¨ã¦ã§æ£ã—ãビルドã§ãã‚‹ã“ã¨ã‚’確èªã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„。ãã®éš›ã€gccåŠã³ãƒªãƒ³ã‚«ãŒ + warningã‚„errorを出ã—ã¦ã„ãªã„ã“ã¨ã‚‚確èªã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„。 + + 2: allnoconfig, allmodconfig オプションを用ã„ã¦æ£ã—ãビルドã§ãã‚‹ã“ã¨ã‚’ + 確èªã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„。 + + 3: 手許ã®ã‚¯ãƒã‚¹ã‚³ãƒ³ãƒ‘イルツールやOSDLã®PLMã®ã‚ˆã†ãªã‚‚ã®ã‚’用ã„ã¦ã€è¤‡æ•°ã® + アーã‚テクãƒãƒ£ã«ãŠã„ã¦ã‚‚æ£ã—ãビルドã§ãã‚‹ã“ã¨ã‚’確èªã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„。 + + 4: 64bité•·ã®'unsigned long'を使用ã—ã¦ã„ã‚‹ppc64ã¯ã€ã‚¯ãƒã‚¹ã‚³ãƒ³ãƒ‘イルã§ã® + ãƒã‚§ãƒƒã‚¯ã«é©å½“ãªã‚¢ãƒ¼ã‚テクãƒãƒ£ã§ã™ã€‚ + + 5: カーãƒãƒ«ã‚³ãƒ¼ãƒ‡ã‚£ãƒ³ã‚°ã‚¹ã‚¿ã‚¤ãƒ«ã«æº–æ‹ ã—ã¦ã„ã‚‹ã‹ã©ã†ã‹ç¢ºèªã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„(!) + + 6: CONFIGオプションã®è¿½åŠ ・変更をã—ãŸå ´åˆã«ã¯ã€CONFIGメニューãŒå£Šã‚Œã¦ã„ãªã„ + ã“ã¨ã‚’確èªã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„。 + + 7: æ–°ã—ãKconfigã®ã‚ªãƒ—ã‚·ãƒ§ãƒ³ã‚’è¿½åŠ ã™ã‚‹éš›ã«ã¯ã€å¿…ãšãã®helpも記述ã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„。 + + 8: é©åˆ‡ãªKconfigã®ä¾å˜é–¢ä¿‚を考ãˆãªãŒã‚‰æ…Žé‡ã«ãƒã‚§ãƒƒã‚¯ã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„。 + ãŸã ã—ã€ã“ã®ä½œæ¥ã¯ãƒžã‚·ãƒ³ã‚’使ã£ãŸãƒ†ã‚¹ãƒˆã§ãã¡ã‚“ã¨è¡Œã†ã®ãŒã¨ã¦ã‚‚困難ã§ã™ã€‚ + ã†ã¾ãã‚„ã‚‹ã«ã¯ã€è‡ªåˆ†ã®é ã§è€ƒãˆã‚‹ã“ã¨ã§ã™ã€‚ + + 9: sparseを利用ã—ã¦ã¡ã‚ƒã‚“ã¨ã—ãŸã‚³ãƒ¼ãƒ‰ãƒã‚§ãƒƒã‚¯ã‚’ã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„。 + +10: 'make checkstack' 㨠'make namespacecheck' を利用ã—ã€å•é¡ŒãŒç™ºè¦‹ã•ã‚ŒãŸã‚‰ + ä¿®æ£ã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„。'make checkstack' ã¯æ˜Žç¤ºçš„ã«å•é¡Œã‚’示ã—ã¾ã›ã‚“ãŒã€ã©ã‚Œã‹ + １ã¤ã®é–¢æ•°ãŒ512ãƒã‚¤ãƒˆã‚ˆã‚Šå¤§ãã„スタックを使ã£ã¦ã„ã‚Œã°ã€ä¿®æ£ã™ã¹ã候補㨠+ ãªã‚Šã¾ã™ã€‚ + +11: ã‚°ãƒãƒ¼ãƒãƒ«ãªkernel API を説明ã™ã‚‹ kernel-doc をソースã®ä¸ã«å«ã‚ã¦ãã ã•ã„。 + ( staticãªé–¢æ•°ã«ãŠã„ã¦ã¯å¿…é ˆã§ã¯ã‚ã‚Šã¾ã›ã‚“ãŒã€å«ã‚ã¦ã‚‚らã£ã¦ã‚‚çµæ§‹ã§ã™ ) + ãã—ã¦ã€'make htmldocs' ã‚‚ã—ã㯠'make mandocs' を利用ã—ã¦è¿½è¨˜ã—㟠+ ドã‚ュメントã®ãƒã‚§ãƒƒã‚¯ã‚’è¡Œã„ã€å•é¡ŒãŒè¦‹ã¤ã‹ã£ãŸå ´åˆã«ã¯ä¿®æ£ã‚’è¡Œã£ã¦ãã ã•ã„。 + +12: CONFIG_PREEMPT, CONFIG_DEBUG_PREEMPT, CONFIG_DEBUG_SLAB, + CONFIG_DEBUG_PAGEALLOC, CONFIG_DEBUG_MUTEXES, CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK, + CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK_SLEEP ã“れら全ã¦ã‚’åŒæ™‚ã«æœ‰åŠ¹ã«ã—ã¦å‹•ä½œç¢ºèªã‚’ + è¡Œã£ã¦ãã ã•ã„。 + +13: CONFIG_SMP, CONFIG_PREEMPT を有効ã«ã—ãŸå ´åˆã¨ç„¡åŠ¹ã«ã—ãŸå ´åˆã®ä¸¡æ–¹ã§ + ビルドã—ãŸä¸Šã€å‹•ä½œç¢ºèªã‚’è¡Œã£ã¦ãã ã•ã„。 + +14: ã‚‚ã—パッãƒãŒãƒ‡ã‚£ã‚¹ã‚¯ã®I/O性能ãªã©ã«å½±éŸ¿ã‚’与ãˆã‚‹ã‚ˆã†ã§ã‚ã‚Œã°ã€ + 'CONFIG_LBD'オプションを有効ã«ã—ãŸå ´åˆã¨ç„¡åŠ¹ã«ã—ãŸå ´åˆã®ä¸¡æ–¹ã§ + テストを実施ã—ã¦ã¿ã¦ãã ã•ã„。 + +15: lockdepã®æ©Ÿèƒ½ã‚’å…¨ã¦æœ‰åŠ¹ã«ã—ãŸä¸Šã§ã€å…¨ã¦ã®ã‚³ãƒ¼ãƒ‰ãƒ‘スを評価ã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„。 + +16: /proc ã«æ–°ã—ã„ã‚¨ãƒ³ãƒˆãƒªã‚’è¿½åŠ ã—ãŸå ´åˆã«ã¯ã€Documentation/ é…下㫠+ å¿…ãšãƒ‰ã‚ãƒ¥ãƒ¡ãƒ³ãƒˆã‚’è¿½åŠ ã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„。 + +17: æ–°ã—ã„ãƒ–ãƒ¼ãƒˆãƒ‘ãƒ©ãƒ¡ãƒ¼ã‚¿ã‚’è¿½åŠ ã—ãŸå ´åˆã«ã¯ã€ + å¿…ãšDocumentation/kernel-parameters.txt ã«èª¬æ˜Žã‚’è¿½åŠ ã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„。 + +18: æ–°ã—ãmoduleã«ãƒ‘ãƒ©ãƒ¡ãƒ¼ã‚¿ã‚’è¿½åŠ ã—ãŸå ´åˆã«ã¯ã€MODULE_PARM_DESC()ã‚’ + 利用ã—ã¦å¿…ãšãã®èª¬æ˜Žã‚’記述ã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„。 + +19: æ–°ã—ã„userspaceインタフェースを作æˆã—ãŸå ´åˆã«ã¯ã€Documentation/ABI/ ã« + Documentation/ABI/README ã‚’å‚考ã«ã—ã¦å¿…ãšãƒ‰ã‚ãƒ¥ãƒ¡ãƒ³ãƒˆã‚’è¿½åŠ ã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„。 + +20: 'make headers_check'を実行ã—ã¦å…¨ãå•é¡ŒãŒãªã„ã“ã¨ã‚’確èªã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„。 + +21: å°‘ãªãã¨ã‚‚slabã‚¢ãƒã‚±ãƒ¼ã‚·ãƒ§ãƒ³ã¨pageã‚¢ãƒã‚±ãƒ¼ã‚·ãƒ§ãƒ³ã«å¤±æ•—ã—ãŸå ´åˆã® + 挙動ã«ã¤ã„ã¦ã€fault-injectionを利用ã—ã¦ç¢ºèªã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„。 + Documentation/fault-injection/ ã‚’å‚ç…§ã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„。 + + è¿½åŠ ã—ãŸã‚³ãƒ¼ãƒ‰ãŒã‹ãªã‚Šã®é‡ã§ã‚ã£ãŸãªã‚‰ã°ã€ã‚µãƒ–システム特有㮠+ fault-injectionã‚’è¿½åŠ ã—ãŸã»ã†ãŒè‰¯ã„ã‹ã‚‚ã—ã‚Œã¾ã›ã‚“。 + +22: æ–°ãŸã«è¿½åŠ ã—ãŸã‚³ãƒ¼ãƒ‰ã¯ã€`gcc -W'ã§ã‚³ãƒ³ãƒ‘イルã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„。 + ã“ã®ã‚ªãƒ—ションã¯å¤§é‡ã®ä¸è¦ãªãƒ¡ãƒƒã‚»ãƒ¼ã‚¸ã‚’出力ã—ã¾ã™ãŒã€ + "warning: comparison between signed and unsigned" ã®ã‚ˆã†ãªãƒ¡ãƒƒã‚»ãƒ¼ã‚¸ã¯ã€ + ãƒã‚°ã‚’見ã¤ã‘ã‚‹ã®ã«å½¹ã«ç«‹ã¡ã¾ã™ã€‚ + +23: 投稿ã—ãŸãƒ‘ッãƒãŒ -mm パッãƒã‚»ãƒƒãƒˆã«ãƒžãƒ¼ã‚¸ã•ã‚ŒãŸå¾Œã€å…¨ã¦ã®æ—¢å˜ã®ãƒ‘ッãƒã‚„ + VM, VFS ãŠã‚ˆã³ãã®ä»–ã®ã‚µãƒ–システムã«é–¢ã™ã‚‹æ§˜ã€…ãªå¤‰æ›´ã¨ã€ç¾æ™‚点ã§ã‚‚å…±å˜ + ã§ãã‚‹ã“ã¨ã‚’確èªã™ã‚‹ãƒ†ã‚¹ãƒˆã‚’è¡Œã£ã¦ãã ã•ã„。 diff --git a/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt index 9691c7f5166..0705040531a 100644 --- a/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt +++ b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt @@ -65,26 +65,26 @@ Install kexec-tools 2) Download the kexec-tools user-space package from the following URL: -http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/horms/kexec-tools/kexec-tools-testing.tar.gz +http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/horms/kexec-tools/kexec-tools.tar.gz -This is a symlink to the latest version, which at the time of writing is -20061214, the only release of kexec-tools-testing so far. As other versions -are released, the older ones will remain available at -http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/horms/kexec-tools/ +This is a symlink to the latest version. -Note: Latest kexec-tools-testing git tree is available at +The latest kexec-tools git tree is available at: -git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/horms/kexec-tools-testing.git +git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/horms/kexec-tools.git or -http://www.kernel.org/git/?p=linux/kernel/git/horms/kexec-tools-testing.git;a=summary +http://www.kernel.org/git/?p=linux/kernel/git/horms/kexec-tools.git + +More information about kexec-tools can be found at +http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/horms/kexec-tools/README.html 3) Unpack the tarball with the tar command, as follows: - tar xvpzf kexec-tools-testing.tar.gz + tar xvpzf kexec-tools.tar.gz 4) Change to the kexec-tools directory, as follows: - cd kexec-tools-testing-VERSION + cd kexec-tools-VERSION 5) Configure the package, as follows: diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 8679e80b9fc..82a079d4097 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -87,7 +87,8 @@ parameter is applicable: SH SuperH architecture is enabled. SMP The kernel is an SMP kernel. SPARC Sparc architecture is enabled. - SWSUSP Software suspend is enabled. + SWSUSP Software suspend (hibernation) is enabled. + SUSPEND System suspend states are enabled. TS Appropriate touchscreen support is enabled. USB USB support is enabled. USBHID USB Human Interface Device support is enabled. @@ -147,10 +148,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file default: 0 acpi_sleep= [HW,ACPI] Sleep options - Format: { s3_bios, s3_mode, s3_beep, old_ordering } + Format: { s3_bios, s3_mode, s3_beep, s4_nohwsig, old_ordering } See Documentation/power/video.txt for s3_bios and s3_mode. s3_beep is for debugging; it makes the PC's speaker beep as soon as the kernel's real-mode entry point is called. + s4_nohwsig prevents ACPI hardware signature from being + used during resume from hibernation. old_ordering causes the ACPI 1.0 ordering of the _PTS control method, wrt putting devices into low power states, to be enforced (the ACPI 2.0 ordering of _PTS is @@ -362,6 +365,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file no delay (0). Format: integer + bootmem_debug [KNL] Enable bootmem allocator debug messages. + bttv.card= [HW,V4L] bttv (bt848 + bt878 based grabber cards) bttv.radio= Most important insmod options are available as kernel args too. @@ -774,8 +779,22 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file hisax= [HW,ISDN] See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax. - hugepages= [HW,X86-32,IA-64] Maximal number of HugeTLB pages. - hugepagesz= [HW,IA-64,PPC] The size of the HugeTLB pages. + hugepages= [HW,X86-32,IA-64] HugeTLB pages to allocate at boot. + hugepagesz= [HW,IA-64,PPC,X86-64] The size of the HugeTLB pages. + On x86-64 and powerpc, this option can be specified + multiple times interleaved with hugepages= to reserve + huge pages of different sizes. Valid pages sizes on + x86-64 are 2M (when the CPU supports "pse") and 1G + (when the CPU supports the "pdpe1gb" cpuinfo flag) + Note that 1GB pages can only be allocated at boot time + using hugepages= and not freed afterwards. + default_hugepagesz= + [same as hugepagesz=] The size of the default + HugeTLB page size. This is the size represented by + the legacy /proc/ hugepages APIs, used for SHM, and + default size when mounting hugetlbfs filesystems. + Defaults to the default architecture's huge page size + if not specified. i8042.direct [HW] Put keyboard port into non-translated mode i8042.dumbkbd [HW] Pretend that controller can only read data from @@ -1055,6 +1074,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file * [no]ncq: Turn on or off NCQ. + * nohrst, nosrst, norst: suppress hard, soft + and both resets. + If there are multiple matching configurations changing the same attribute, the last one is used. @@ -1225,6 +1247,14 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file mga= [HW,DRM] + mminit_loglevel= + [KNL] When CONFIG_DEBUG_MEMORY_INIT is set, this + parameter allows control of the logging verbosity for + the additional memory initialisation checks. A value + of 0 disables mminit logging and a level of 4 will + log everything. Information is printed at KERN_DEBUG + so loglevel=8 may also need to be specified. + mousedev.tap_time= [MOUSE] Maximum time between finger touching and leaving touchpad surface for touch to be considered @@ -2107,6 +2137,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file tdfx= [HW,DRM] + test_suspend= [SUSPEND] + Specify "mem" (for Suspend-to-RAM) or "standby" (for + standby suspend) as the system sleep state to briefly + enter during system startup. The system is woken from + this state using a wakeup-capable RTC alarm. + thash_entries= [KNL,NET] Set number of hash buckets for TCP connection @@ -2134,13 +2170,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file <deci-seconds>: poll all this frequency 0: no polling (default) - tipar.timeout= [HW,PPT] - Set communications timeout in tenths of a second - (default 15). - - tipar.delay= [HW,PPT] - Set inter-bit delay in microseconds (default 10). - tmscsim= [HW,SCSI] See comment before function dc390_setup() in drivers/scsi/tmscsim.c. diff --git a/Documentation/keys.txt b/Documentation/keys.txt index d5c7a57d170..b56aacc1fff 100644 --- a/Documentation/keys.txt +++ b/Documentation/keys.txt @@ -864,7 +864,7 @@ payload contents" for more information. request_key_with_auxdata() respectively. These two functions return with the key potentially still under - construction. To wait for contruction completion, the following should be + construction. To wait for construction completion, the following should be called: int wait_for_key_construction(struct key *key, bool intr); diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt index 64b3f146e4b..71f0fe1fc1b 100644 --- a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt +++ b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ ThinkPad ACPI Extras Driver - Version 0.20 - April 09th, 2008 + Version 0.21 + May 29th, 2008 Borislav Deianov <borislav@users.sf.net> Henrique de Moraes Holschuh <hmh@hmh.eng.br> @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ detailed description): - LCD brightness control - Volume control - Fan control and monitoring: fan speed, fan enable/disable - - Experimental: WAN enable and disable + - WAN enable and disable A compatibility table by model and feature is maintained on the web site, http://ibm-acpi.sf.net/. I appreciate any success or failure @@ -621,7 +621,8 @@ Bluetooth --------- procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/bluetooth -sysfs device attribute: bluetooth_enable +sysfs device attribute: bluetooth_enable (deprecated) +sysfs rfkill class: switch "tpacpi_bluetooth_sw" This feature shows the presence and current state of a ThinkPad Bluetooth device in the internal ThinkPad CDC slot. @@ -643,8 +644,12 @@ Sysfs notes: 0: disables Bluetooth / Bluetooth is disabled 1: enables Bluetooth / Bluetooth is enabled. - Note: this interface will be probably be superseded by the - generic rfkill class, so it is NOT to be considered stable yet. + Note: this interface has been superseded by the generic rfkill + class. It has been deprecated, and it will be removed in year + 2010. + + rfkill controller switch "tpacpi_bluetooth_sw": refer to + Documentation/rfkill.txt for details. Video output control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/video -------------------------------------------- @@ -1370,16 +1375,12 @@ with EINVAL, try to set pwm1_enable to 1 and pwm1 to at least 128 (255 would be the safest choice, though). -EXPERIMENTAL: WAN ------------------ +WAN +--- procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/wan -sysfs device attribute: wwan_enable - -This feature is marked EXPERIMENTAL because the implementation -directly accesses hardware registers and may not work as expected. USE -WITH CAUTION! To use this feature, you need to supply the -experimental=1 parameter when loading the module. +sysfs device attribute: wwan_enable (deprecated) +sysfs rfkill class: switch "tpacpi_wwan_sw" This feature shows the presence and current state of a W-WAN (Sierra Wireless EV-DO) device. @@ -1404,8 +1405,12 @@ Sysfs notes: 0: disables WWAN card / WWAN card is disabled 1: enables WWAN card / WWAN card is enabled. - Note: this interface will be probably be superseded by the - generic rfkill class, so it is NOT to be considered stable yet. + Note: this interface has been superseded by the generic rfkill + class. It has been deprecated, and it will be removed in year + 2010. + + rfkill controller switch "tpacpi_wwan_sw": refer to + Documentation/rfkill.txt for details. Multiple Commands, Module Parameters ------------------------------------ diff --git a/Documentation/leds-class.txt b/Documentation/leds-class.txt index 18860ad9935..6399557cdab 100644 --- a/Documentation/leds-class.txt +++ b/Documentation/leds-class.txt @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Hardware accelerated blink of LEDs Some LEDs can be programmed to blink without any CPU interaction. To support this feature, a LED driver can optionally implement the -blink_set() function (see <linux/leds.h>). If implemeted, triggers can +blink_set() function (see <linux/leds.h>). If implemented, triggers can attempt to use it before falling back to software timers. The blink_set() function should return 0 if the blink setting is supported, or -EINVAL otherwise, which means that LED blinking will be handled by software. diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c index 82fafe0429f..7228369d101 100644 --- a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c +++ b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c @@ -36,11 +36,13 @@ #include <sched.h> #include <limits.h> #include <stddef.h> +#include <signal.h> #include "linux/lguest_launcher.h" #include "linux/virtio_config.h" #include "linux/virtio_net.h" #include "linux/virtio_blk.h" #include "linux/virtio_console.h" +#include "linux/virtio_rng.h" #include "linux/virtio_ring.h" #include "asm-x86/bootparam.h" /*L:110 We can ignore the 39 include files we need for this program, but I do @@ -64,8 +66,8 @@ typedef uint8_t u8; #endif /* We can have up to 256 pages for devices. */ #define DEVICE_PAGES 256 -/* This will occupy 2 pages: it must be a power of 2. */ -#define VIRTQUEUE_NUM 128 +/* This will occupy 3 pages: it must be a power of 2. */ +#define VIRTQUEUE_NUM 256 /*L:120 verbose is both a global flag and a macro. The C preprocessor allows * this, and although I wouldn't recommend it, it works quite nicely here. */ @@ -74,12 +76,19 @@ static bool verbose; do { if (verbose) printf(args); } while(0) /*:*/ -/* The pipe to send commands to the waker process */ -static int waker_fd; +/* File descriptors for the Waker. */ +struct { + int pipe[2]; + int lguest_fd; +} waker_fds; + /* The pointer to the start of guest memory. */ static void *guest_base; /* The maximum guest physical address allowed, and maximum possible. */ static unsigned long guest_limit, guest_max; +/* The pipe for signal hander to write to. */ +static int timeoutpipe[2]; +static unsigned int timeout_usec = 500; /* a per-cpu variable indicating whose vcpu is currently running */ static unsigned int __thread cpu_id; @@ -155,11 +164,14 @@ struct virtqueue /* Last available index we saw. */ u16 last_avail_idx; - /* The routine to call when the Guest pings us. */ - void (*handle_output)(int fd, struct virtqueue *me); + /* The routine to call when the Guest pings us, or timeout. */ + void (*handle_output)(int fd, struct virtqueue *me, bool timeout); /* Outstanding buffers */ unsigned int inflight; + + /* Is this blocked awaiting a timer? */ + bool blocked; }; /* Remember the arguments to the program so we can "reboot" */ @@ -190,6 +202,9 @@ static void *_convert(struct iovec *iov, size_t size, size_t align, return iov->iov_base; } +/* Wrapper for the last available index. Makes it easier to change. */ +#define lg_last_avail(vq) ((vq)->last_avail_idx) + /* The virtio configuration space is defined to be little-endian. x86 is * little-endian too, but it's nice to be explicit so we have these helpers. */ #define cpu_to_le16(v16) (v16) @@ -199,6 +214,33 @@ static void *_convert(struct iovec *iov, size_t size, size_t align, #define le32_to_cpu(v32) (v32) #define le64_to_cpu(v64) (v64) +/* Is this iovec empty? */ +static bool iov_empty(const struct iovec iov[], unsigned int num_iov) +{ + unsigned int i; + + for (i = 0; i < num_iov; i++) + if (iov[i].iov_len) + return false; + return true; +} + +/* Take len bytes from the front of this iovec. */ +static void iov_consume(struct iovec iov[], unsigned num_iov, unsigned len) +{ + unsigned int i; + + for (i = 0; i < num_iov; i++) { + unsigned int used; + + used = iov[i].iov_len < len ? iov[i].iov_len : len; + iov[i].iov_base += used; + iov[i].iov_len -= used; + len -= used; + } + assert(len == 0); +} + /* The device virtqueue descriptors are followed by feature bitmasks. */ static u8 *get_feature_bits(struct device *dev) { @@ -254,6 +296,7 @@ static void *map_zeroed_pages(unsigned int num) PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE|PROT_EXEC, MAP_PRIVATE, fd, 0); if (addr == MAP_FAILED) err(1, "Mmaping %u pages of /dev/zero", num); + close(fd); return addr; } @@ -540,69 +583,64 @@ static void add_device_fd(int fd) * watch, but handing a file descriptor mask through to the kernel is fairly * icky. * - * Instead, we fork off a process which watches the file descriptors and writes + * Instead, we clone off a thread which watches the file descriptors and writes * the LHREQ_BREAK command to the /dev/lguest file descriptor to tell the Host * stop running the Guest. This causes the Launcher to return from the * /dev/lguest read with -EAGAIN, where it will write to /dev/lguest to reset * the LHREQ_BREAK and wake us up again. * * This, of course, is merely a different *kind* of icky. + * + * Given my well-known antipathy to threads, I'd prefer to use processes. But + * it's easier to share Guest memory with threads, and trivial to share the + * devices.infds as the Launcher changes it. */ -static void wake_parent(int pipefd, int lguest_fd) +static int waker(void *unused) { - /* Add the pipe from the Launcher to the fdset in the device_list, so - * we watch it, too. */ - add_device_fd(pipefd); + /* Close the write end of the pipe: only the Launcher has it open. */ + close(waker_fds.pipe[1]); for (;;) { fd_set rfds = devices.infds; unsigned long args[] = { LHREQ_BREAK, 1 }; + unsigned int maxfd = devices.max_infd; + + /* We also listen to the pipe from the Launcher. */ + FD_SET(waker_fds.pipe[0], &rfds); + if (waker_fds.pipe[0] > maxfd) + maxfd = waker_fds.pipe[0]; /* Wait until input is ready from one of the devices. */ - select(devices.max_infd+1, &rfds, NULL, NULL, NULL); - /* Is it a message from the Launcher? */ - if (FD_ISSET(pipefd, &rfds)) { - int fd; - /* If read() returns 0, it means the Launcher has - * exited. We silently follow. */ - if (read(pipefd, &fd, sizeof(fd)) == 0) - exit(0); - /* Otherwise it's telling us to change what file - * descriptors we're to listen to. Positive means - * listen to a new one, negative means stop - * listening. */ - if (fd >= 0) - FD_SET(fd, &devices.infds); - else - FD_CLR(-fd - 1, &devices.infds); - } else /* Send LHREQ_BREAK command. */ - pwrite(lguest_fd, args, sizeof(args), cpu_id); + select(maxfd+1, &rfds, NULL, NULL, NULL); + + /* Message from Launcher? */ + if (FD_ISSET(waker_fds.pipe[0], &rfds)) { + char c; + /* If this fails, then assume Launcher has exited. + * Don't do anything on exit: we're just a thread! */ + if (read(waker_fds.pipe[0], &c, 1) != 1) + _exit(0); + continue; + } + + /* Send LHREQ_BREAK command to snap the Launcher out of it. */ + pwrite(waker_fds.lguest_fd, args, sizeof(args), cpu_id); } + return 0; } /* This routine just sets up a pipe to the Waker process. */ -static int setup_waker(int lguest_fd) -{ - int pipefd[2], child; - - /* We create a pipe to talk to the Waker, and also so it knows when the - * Launcher dies (and closes pipe). */ - pipe(pipefd); - child = fork(); - if (child == -1) - err(1, "forking"); - - if (child == 0) { - /* We are the Waker: close the "writing" end of our copy of the - * pipe and start waiting for input. */ - close(pipefd[1]); - wake_parent(pipefd[0], lguest_fd); - } - /* Close the reading end of our copy of the pipe. */ - close(pipefd[0]); +static void setup_waker(int lguest_fd) +{ + /* This pipe is closed when Launcher dies, telling Waker. */ + if (pipe(waker_fds.pipe) != 0) + err(1, "Creating pipe for Waker"); + + /* Waker also needs to know the lguest fd */ + waker_fds.lguest_fd = lguest_fd; - /* Here is the fd used to talk to the waker. */ - return pipefd[1]; + if (clone(waker, malloc(4096) + 4096, CLONE_VM | SIGCHLD, NULL) == -1) + err(1, "Creating Waker"); } /* @@ -661,19 +699,22 @@ static unsigned get_vq_desc(struct virtqueue *vq, unsigned int *out_num, unsigned int *in_num) { unsigned int i, head; + u16 last_avail; /* Check it isn't doing very strange things with descriptor numbers. */ - if ((u16)(vq->vring.avail->idx - vq->last_avail_idx) > vq->vring.num) + last_avail = lg_last_avail(vq); + if ((u16)(vq->vring.avail->idx - last_avail) > vq->vring.num) errx(1, "Guest moved used index from %u to %u", - vq->last_avail_idx, vq->vring.avail->idx); + last_avail, vq->vring.avail->idx); /* If there's nothing new since last we looked, return invalid. */ - if (vq->vring.avail->idx == vq->last_avail_idx) + if (vq->vring.avail->idx == last_avail) return vq->vring.num; /* Grab the next descriptor number they're advertising, and increment * the index we've seen. */ - head = vq->vring.avail->ring[vq->last_avail_idx++ % vq->vring.num]; + head = vq->vring.avail->ring[last_avail % vq->vring.num]; + lg_last_avail(vq)++; /* If their number is silly, that's a fatal mistake. */ if (head >= vq->vring.num) @@ -821,8 +862,8 @@ static bool handle_console_input(int fd, struct device *dev) unsigned long args[] = { LHREQ_BREAK, 0 }; /* Close the fd so Waker will know it has to * exit. */ - close(waker_fd); - /* Just in case waker is blocked in BREAK, send + close(waker_fds.pipe[1]); + /* Just in case Waker is blocked in BREAK, send * unbreak now. */ write(fd, args, sizeof(args)); exit(2); @@ -839,7 +880,7 @@ static bool handle_console_input(int fd, struct device *dev) /* Handling output for console is simple: we just get all the output buffers * and write them to stdout. */ -static void handle_console_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq) +static void handle_console_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq, bool timeout) { unsigned int head, out, in; int len; @@ -854,6 +895,24 @@ static void handle_console_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq) } } +/* This is called when we no longer want to hear about Guest changes to a + * virtqueue. This is more efficient in high-traffic cases, but it means we + * have to set a timer to check if any more changes have occurred. */ +static void block_vq(struct virtqueue *vq) +{ + struct itimerval itm; + + vq->vring.used->flags |= VRING_USED_F_NO_NOTIFY; + vq->blocked = true; + + itm.it_interval.tv_sec = 0; + itm.it_interval.tv_usec = 0; + itm.it_value.tv_sec = 0; + itm.it_value.tv_usec = timeout_usec; + + setitimer(ITIMER_REAL, &itm, NULL); +} + /* * The Network * @@ -861,22 +920,39 @@ static void handle_console_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq) * and write them (ignoring the first element) to this device's file descriptor * (/dev/net/tun). */ -static void handle_net_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq) +static void handle_net_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq, bool timeout) { - unsigned int head, out, in; + unsigned int head, out, in, num = 0; int len; struct iovec iov[vq->vring.num]; + static int last_timeout_num; /* Keep getting output buffers from the Guest until we run out. */ while ((head = get_vq_desc(vq, iov, &out, &in)) != vq->vring.num) { if (in) errx(1, "Input buffers in output queue?"); - /* Check header, but otherwise ignore it (we told the Guest we - * supported no features, so it shouldn't have anything - * interesting). */ - (void)convert(&iov[0], struct virtio_net_hdr); - len = writev(vq->dev->fd, iov+1, out-1); + len = writev(vq->dev->fd, iov, out); + if (len < 0) + err(1, "Writing network packet to tun"); add_used_and_trigger(fd, vq, head, len); + num++; + } + + /* Block further kicks and set up a timer if we saw anything. */ + if (!timeout && num) + block_vq(vq); + + /* We never quite know how long should we wait before we check the + * queue again for more packets. We start at 500 microseconds, and if + * we get fewer packets than last time, we assume we made the timeout + * too small and increase it by 10 microseconds. Otherwise, we drop it + * by one microsecond every time. It seems to work well enough. */ + if (timeout) { + if (num < last_timeout_num) + timeout_usec += 10; + else if (timeout_usec > 1) + timeout_usec--; + last_timeout_num = num; } } @@ -887,7 +963,6 @@ static bool handle_tun_input(int fd, struct device *dev) unsigned int head, in_num, out_num; int len; struct iovec iov[dev->vq->vring.num]; - struct virtio_net_hdr *hdr; /* First we need a network buffer from the Guests's recv virtqueue. */ head = get_vq_desc(dev->vq, iov, &out_num, &in_num); @@ -896,25 +971,23 @@ static bool handle_tun_input(int fd, struct device *dev) * early, the Guest won't be ready yet. Wait until the device * status says it's ready. */ /* FIXME: Actually want DRIVER_ACTIVE here. */ - if (dev->desc->status & VIRTIO_CONFIG_S_DRIVER_OK) - warn("network: no dma buffer!"); + + /* Now tell it we want to know if new things appear. */ + dev->vq->vring.used->flags &= ~VRING_USED_F_NO_NOTIFY; + wmb(); + /* We'll turn this back on if input buffers are registered. */ return false; } else if (out_num) errx(1, "Output buffers in network recv queue?"); - /* First element is the header: we set it to 0 (no features). */ - hdr = convert(&iov[0], struct virtio_net_hdr); - hdr->flags = 0; - hdr->gso_type = VIRTIO_NET_HDR_GSO_NONE; - /* Read the packet from the device directly into the Guest's buffer. */ - len = readv(dev->fd, iov+1, in_num-1); + len = readv(dev->fd, iov, in_num); if (len <= 0) err(1, "reading network"); /* Tell the Guest about the new packet. */ - add_used_and_trigger(fd, dev->vq, head, sizeof(*hdr) + len); + add_used_and_trigger(fd, dev->vq, head, len); verbose("tun input packet len %i [%02x %02x] (%s)\n", len, ((u8 *)iov[1].iov_base)[0], ((u8 *)iov[1].iov_base)[1], @@ -927,11 +1000,18 @@ static bool handle_tun_input(int fd, struct device *dev) /*L:215 This is the callback attached to the network and console input * virtqueues: it ensures we try again, in case we stopped console or net * delivery because Guest didn't have any buffers. */ -static void enable_fd(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq) +static void enable_fd(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq, bool timeout) { add_device_fd(vq->dev->fd); - /* Tell waker to listen to it again */ - write(waker_fd, &vq->dev->fd, sizeof(vq->dev->fd)); + /* Snap the Waker out of its select loop. */ + write(waker_fds.pipe[1], "", 1); +} + +static void net_enable_fd(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq, bool timeout) +{ + /* We don't need to know again when Guest refills receive buffer. */ + vq->vring.used->flags |= VRING_USED_F_NO_NOTIFY; + enable_fd(fd, vq, timeout); } /* When the Guest tells us they updated the status field, we handle it. */ @@ -951,7 +1031,7 @@ static void update_device_status(struct device *dev) for (vq = dev->vq; vq; vq = vq->next) { memset(vq->vring.desc, 0, vring_size(vq->config.num, getpagesize())); - vq->last_avail_idx = 0; + lg_last_avail(vq) = 0; } } else if (dev->desc->status & VIRTIO_CONFIG_S_FAILED) { warnx("Device %s configuration FAILED", dev->name); @@ -960,10 +1040,10 @@ static void update_device_status(struct device *dev) verbose("Device %s OK: offered", dev->name); for (i = 0; i < dev->desc->feature_len; i++) - verbose(" %08x", get_feature_bits(dev)[i]); + verbose(" %02x", get_feature_bits(dev)[i]); verbose(", accepted"); for (i = 0; i < dev->desc->feature_len; i++) - verbose(" %08x", get_feature_bits(dev) + verbose(" %02x", get_feature_bits(dev) [dev->desc->feature_len+i]); if (dev->ready) @@ -1000,7 +1080,7 @@ static void handle_output(int fd, unsigned long addr) if (strcmp(vq->dev->name, "console") != 0) verbose("Output to %s\n", vq->dev->name); if (vq->handle_output) - vq->handle_output(fd, vq); + vq->handle_output(fd, vq, false); return; } } @@ -1014,6 +1094,29 @@ static void handle_output(int fd, unsigned long addr) strnlen(from_guest_phys(addr), guest_limit - addr)); } +static void handle_timeout(int fd) +{ + char buf[32]; + struct device *i; + struct virtqueue *vq; + + /* Clear the pipe */ + read(timeoutpipe[0], buf, sizeof(buf)); + + /* Check each device and virtqueue: flush blocked ones. */ + for (i = devices.dev; i; i = i->next) { + for (vq = i->vq; vq; vq = vq->next) { + if (!vq->blocked) + continue; + + vq->vring.used->flags &= ~VRING_USED_F_NO_NOTIFY; + vq->blocked = false; + if (vq->handle_output) + vq->handle_output(fd, vq, true); + } + } +} + /* This is called when the Waker wakes us up: check for incoming file * descriptors. */ static void handle_input(int fd) @@ -1024,16 +1127,20 @@ static void handle_input(int fd) for (;;) { struct device *i; fd_set fds = devices.infds; + int num; + num = select(devices.max_infd+1, &fds, NULL, NULL, &poll); + /* Could get interrupted */ + if (num < 0) + continue; /* If nothing is ready, we're done. */ - if (select(devices.max_infd+1, &fds, NULL, NULL, &poll) == 0) + if (num == 0) break; /* Otherwise, call the device(s) which have readable file * descriptors and a method of handling them. */ for (i = devices.dev; i; i = i->next) { if (i->handle_input && FD_ISSET(i->fd, &fds)) { - int dev_fd; if (i->handle_input(fd, i)) continue; @@ -1043,13 +1150,12 @@ static void handle_input(int fd) * buffers to deliver into. Console also uses * it when it discovers that stdin is closed. */ FD_CLR(i->fd, &devices.infds); - /* Tell waker to ignore it too, by sending a - * negative fd number (-1, since 0 is a valid - * FD number). */ - dev_fd = -i->fd - 1; - write(waker_fd, &dev_fd, sizeof(dev_fd)); } } + + /* Is this the timeout fd? */ + if (FD_ISSET(timeoutpipe[0], &fds)) + handle_timeout(fd); } } @@ -1098,7 +1204,7 @@ static struct lguest_device_desc *new_dev_desc(u16 type) /* Each device descriptor is followed by the description of its virtqueues. We * specify how many descriptors the virtqueue is to have. */ static void add_virtqueue(struct device *dev, unsigned int num_descs, - void (*handle_output)(int fd, struct virtqueue *me)) + void (*handle_output)(int, struct virtqueue *, bool)) { unsigned int pages; struct virtqueue **i, *vq = malloc(sizeof(*vq)); @@ -1114,6 +1220,7 @@ static void add_virtqueue(struct device *dev, unsigned int num_descs, vq->last_avail_idx = 0; vq->dev = dev; vq->inflight = 0; + vq->blocked = false; /* Initialize the configuration. */ vq->config.num = num_descs; @@ -1246,6 +1353,24 @@ static void setup_console(void) } /*:*/ +static void timeout_alarm(int sig) +{ + write(timeoutpipe[1], "", 1); +} + +static void setup_timeout(void) +{ + if (pipe(timeoutpipe) != 0) + err(1, "Creating timeout pipe"); + + if (fcntl(timeoutpipe[1], F_SETFL, + fcntl(timeoutpipe[1], F_GETFL) | O_NONBLOCK) != 0) + err(1, "Making timeout pipe nonblocking"); + + add_device_fd(timeoutpipe[0]); + signal(SIGALRM, timeout_alarm); +} + /*M:010 Inter-guest networking is an interesting area. Simplest is to have a * --sharenet=<name> option which opens or creates a named pipe. This can be * used to send packets to another guest in a 1:1 manner. @@ -1264,10 +1389,25 @@ static void setup_console(void) static u32 str2ip(const char *ipaddr) { - unsigned int byte[4]; + unsigned int b[4]; + + if (sscanf(ipaddr, "%u.%u.%u.%u", &b[0], &b[1], &b[2], &b[3]) != 4) + errx(1, "Failed to parse IP address '%s'", ipaddr); + return (b[0] << 24) | (b[1] << 16) | (b[2] << 8) | b[3]; +} - sscanf(ipaddr, "%u.%u.%u.%u", &byte[0], &byte[1], &byte[2], &byte[3]); - return (byte[0] << 24) | (byte[1] << 16) | (byte[2] << 8) | byte[3]; +static void str2mac(const char *macaddr, unsigned char mac[6]) +{ + unsigned int m[6]; + if (sscanf(macaddr, "%02x:%02x:%02x:%02x:%02x:%02x", + &m[0], &m[1], &m[2], &m[3], &m[4], &m[5]) != 6) + errx(1, "Failed to parse mac address '%s'", macaddr); + mac[0] = m[0]; + mac[1] = m[1]; + mac[2] = m[2]; + mac[3] = m[3]; + mac[4] = m[4]; + mac[5] = m[5]; } /* This code is "adapted" from libbridge: it attaches the Host end of the @@ -1288,6 +1428,7 @@ static void add_to_bridge(int fd, const char *if_name, const char *br_name) errx(1, "interface %s does not exist!", if_name); strncpy(ifr.ifr_name, br_name, IFNAMSIZ); + ifr.ifr_name[IFNAMSIZ-1] = '\0'; ifr.ifr_ifindex = ifidx; if (ioctl(fd, SIOCBRADDIF, &ifr) < 0) err(1, "can't add %s to bridge %s", if_name, br_name); @@ -1296,64 +1437,75 @@ static void add_to_bridge(int fd, const char *if_name, const char *br_name) /* This sets up the Host end of the network device with an IP address, brings * it up so packets will flow, the copies the MAC address into the hwaddr * pointer. */ -static void configure_device(int fd, const char *devname, u32 ipaddr, - unsigned char hwaddr[6]) +static void configure_device(int fd, const char *tapif, u32 ipaddr) { struct ifreq ifr; struct sockaddr_in *sin = (struct sockaddr_in *)&ifr.ifr_addr; - /* Don't read these incantations. Just cut & paste them like I did! */ memset(&ifr, 0, sizeof(ifr)); - strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, devname); + strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, tapif); + + /* Don't read these incantations. Just cut & paste them like I did! */ sin->sin_family = AF_INET; sin->sin_addr.s_addr = htonl(ipaddr); if (ioctl(fd, SIOCSIFADDR, &ifr) != 0) - err(1, "Setting %s interface address", devname); + err(1, "Setting %s interface address", tapif); ifr.ifr_flags = IFF_UP; if (ioctl(fd, SIOCSIFFLAGS, &ifr) != 0) - err(1, "Bringing interface %s up", devname); - - /* SIOC stands for Socket I/O Control. G means Get (vs S for Set - * above). IF means Interface, and HWADDR is hardware address. - * Simple! */ - if (ioctl(fd, SIOCGIFHWADDR, &ifr) != 0) - err(1, "getting hw address for %s", devname); - memcpy(hwaddr, ifr.ifr_hwaddr.sa_data, 6); + err(1, "Bringing interface %s up", tapif); } -/*L:195 Our network is a Host<->Guest network. This can either use bridging or - * routing, but the principle is the same: it uses the "tun" device to inject - * packets into the Host as if they came in from a normal network card. We - * just shunt packets between the Guest and the tun device. */ -static void setup_tun_net(const char *arg) +static int get_tun_device(char tapif[IFNAMSIZ]) { - struct device *dev; struct ifreq ifr; - int netfd, ipfd; - u32 ip; - const char *br_name = NULL; - struct virtio_net_config conf; + int netfd; + + /* Start with this zeroed. Messy but sure. */ + memset(&ifr, 0, sizeof(ifr)); /* We open the /dev/net/tun device and tell it we want a tap device. A * tap device is like a tun device, only somehow different. To tell * the truth, I completely blundered my way through this code, but it * works now! */ netfd = open_or_die("/dev/net/tun", O_RDWR); - memset(&ifr, 0, sizeof(ifr)); - ifr.ifr_flags = IFF_TAP | IFF_NO_PI; + ifr.ifr_flags = IFF_TAP | IFF_NO_PI | IFF_VNET_HDR; strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, "tap%d"); if (ioctl(netfd, TUNSETIFF, &ifr) != 0) err(1, "configuring /dev/net/tun"); + + if (ioctl(netfd, TUNSETOFFLOAD, + TUN_F_CSUM|TUN_F_TSO4|TUN_F_TSO6|TUN_F_TSO_ECN) != 0) + err(1, "Could not set features for tun device"); + /* We don't need checksums calculated for packets coming in this * device: trust us! */ ioctl(netfd, TUNSETNOCSUM, 1); + memcpy(tapif, ifr.ifr_name, IFNAMSIZ); + return netfd; +} + +/*L:195 Our network is a Host<->Guest network. This can either use bridging or + * routing, but the principle is the same: it uses the "tun" device to inject + * packets into the Host as if they came in from a normal network card. We + * just shunt packets between the Guest and the tun device. */ +static void setup_tun_net(char *arg) +{ + struct device *dev; + int netfd, ipfd; + u32 ip = INADDR_ANY; + bool bridging = false; + char tapif[IFNAMSIZ], *p; + struct virtio_net_config conf; + + netfd = get_tun_device(tapif); + /* First we create a new network device. */ dev = new_device("net", VIRTIO_ID_NET, netfd, handle_tun_input); /* Network devices need a receive and a send queue, just like * console. */ - add_virtqueue(dev, VIRTQUEUE_NUM, enable_fd); + add_virtqueue(dev, VIRTQUEUE_NUM, net_enable_fd); add_virtqueue(dev, VIRTQUEUE_NUM, handle_net_output); /* We need a socket to perform the magic network ioctls to bring up the @@ -1364,28 +1516,50 @@ static void setup_tun_net(const char *arg) /* If the command line was --tunnet=bridge:<name> do bridging. */ if (!strncmp(BRIDGE_PFX, arg, strlen(BRIDGE_PFX))) { - ip = INADDR_ANY; - br_name = arg + strlen(BRIDGE_PFX); - add_to_bridge(ipfd, ifr.ifr_name, br_name); - } else /* It is an IP address to set up the device with */ + arg += strlen(BRIDGE_PFX); + bridging = true; + } + + /* A mac address may follow the bridge name or IP address */ + p = strchr(arg, ':'); + if (p) { + str2mac(p+1, conf.mac); + add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_MAC); + *p = '\0'; + } + + /* arg is now either an IP address or a bridge name */ + if (bridging) + add_to_bridge(ipfd, tapif, arg); + else ip = str2ip(arg); - /* Set up the tun device, and get the mac address for the interface. */ - configure_device(ipfd, ifr.ifr_name, ip, conf.mac); + /* Set up the tun device. */ + configure_device(ipfd, tapif, ip); - /* Tell Guest what MAC address to use. */ - add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_MAC); add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_F_NOTIFY_ON_EMPTY); + /* Expect Guest to handle everything except UFO */ + add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_CSUM); + add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_CSUM); + add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_TSO4); + add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_TSO6); + add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_GUEST_ECN); + add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_HOST_TSO4); + add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_HOST_TSO6); + add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_NET_F_HOST_ECN); set_config(dev, sizeof(conf), &conf); /* We don't need the socket any more; setup is done. */ close(ipfd); - verbose("device %u: tun net %u.%u.%u.%u\n", - devices.device_num++, - (u8)(ip>>24),(u8)(ip>>16),(u8)(ip>>8),(u8)ip); - if (br_name) - verbose("attached to bridge: %s\n", br_name); + devices.device_num++; + + if (bridging) + verbose("device %u: tun %s attached to bridge: %s\n", + devices.device_num, tapif, arg); + else + verbose("device %u: tun %s: %s\n", + devices.device_num, tapif, arg); } /* Our block (disk) device should be really simple: the Guest asks for a block @@ -1550,7 +1724,7 @@ static bool handle_io_finish(int fd, struct device *dev) } /* When the Guest submits some I/O, we just need to wake the I/O thread. */ -static void handle_virtblk_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq) +static void handle_virtblk_output(int fd, struct virtqueue *vq, bool timeout) { struct vblk_info *vblk = vq->dev->priv; char c = 0; @@ -1621,6 +1795,64 @@ static void setup_block_file(const char *filename) verbose("device %u: virtblock %llu sectors\n", devices.device_num, le64_to_cpu(conf.capacity)); } + +/* Our random number generator device reads from /dev/random into the Guest's + * input buffers. The usual case is that the Guest doesn't want random numbers + * and so has no buffers although /dev/random is still readable, whereas + * console is the reverse. + * + * The same logic applies, however. */ +static bool handle_rng_input(int fd, struct device *dev) +{ + int len; + unsigned int head, in_num, out_num, totlen = 0; + struct iovec iov[dev->vq->vring.num]; + + /* First we need a buffer from the Guests's virtqueue. */ + head = get_vq_desc(dev->vq, iov, &out_num, &in_num); + + /* If they're not ready for input, stop listening to this file + * descriptor. We'll start again once they add an input buffer. */ + if (head == dev->vq->vring.num) + return false; + + if (out_num) + errx(1, "Output buffers in rng?"); + + /* This is why we convert to iovecs: the readv() call uses them, and so + * it reads straight into the Guest's buffer. We loop to make sure we + * fill it. */ + while (!iov_empty(iov, in_num)) { + len = readv(dev->fd, iov, in_num); + if (len <= 0) + err(1, "Read from /dev/random gave %i", len); + iov_consume(iov, in_num, len); + totlen += len; + } + + /* Tell the Guest about the new input. */ + add_used_and_trigger(fd, dev->vq, head, totlen); + + /* Everything went OK! */ + return true; +} + +/* And this creates a "hardware" random number device for the Guest. */ +static void setup_rng(void) +{ + struct device *dev; + int fd; + + fd = open_or_die("/dev/random", O_RDONLY); + + /* The device responds to return from I/O thread. */ + dev = new_device("rng", VIRTIO_ID_RNG, fd, handle_rng_input); + + /* The device has one virtqueue, where the Guest places inbufs. */ + add_virtqueue(dev, VIRTQUEUE_NUM, enable_fd); + + verbose("device %u: rng\n", devices.device_num++); +} /* That's the end of device setup. */ /*L:230 Reboot is pretty easy: clean up and exec() the Launcher afresh. */ @@ -1628,11 +1860,12 @@ static void __attribute__((noreturn)) restart_guest(void) { unsigned int i; - /* Closing pipes causes the Waker thread and io_threads to die, and - * closing /dev/lguest cleans up the Guest. Since we don't track all - * open fds, we simply close everything beyond stderr. */ + /* Since we don't track all open fds, we simply close everything beyond + * stderr. */ for (i = 3; i < FD_SETSIZE; i++) close(i); + + /* The exec automatically gets rid of the I/O and Waker threads. */ execv(main_args[0], main_args); err(1, "Could not exec %s", main_args[0]); } @@ -1663,7 +1896,7 @@ static void __attribute__((noreturn)) run_guest(int lguest_fd) /* ERESTART means that we need to reboot the guest */ } else if (errno == ERESTART) { restart_guest(); - /* EAGAIN means the Waker wanted us to look at some input. + /* EAGAIN means a signal (timeout). * Anything else means a bug or incompatible change. */ } else if (errno != EAGAIN) err(1, "Running guest failed"); @@ -1691,13 +1924,14 @@ static struct option opts[] = { { "verbose", 0, NULL, 'v' }, { "tunnet", 1, NULL, 't' }, { "block", 1, NULL, 'b' }, + { "rng", 0, NULL, 'r' }, { "initrd", 1, NULL, 'i' }, { NULL }, }; static void usage(void) { errx(1, "Usage: lguest [--verbose] " - "[--tunnet=(<ipaddr>|bridge:<bridgename>)\n" + "[--tunnet=(<ipaddr>:<macaddr>|bridge:<bridgename>:<macaddr>)\n" "|--block=<filename>|--initrd=<filename>]...\n" "<mem-in-mb> vmlinux [args...]"); } @@ -1765,6 +1999,9 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) case 'b': setup_block_file(optarg); break; + case 'r': + setup_rng(); + break; case 'i': initrd_name = optarg; break; @@ -1783,6 +2020,9 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) /* We always have a console device */ setup_console(); + /* We can timeout waiting for Guest network transmit. */ + setup_timeout(); + /* Now we load the kernel */ start = load_kernel(open_or_die(argv[optind+1], O_RDONLY)); @@ -1826,10 +2066,10 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) * /dev/lguest file descriptor. */ lguest_fd = tell_kernel(pgdir, start); - /* We fork off a child process, which wakes the Launcher whenever one - * of the input file descriptors needs attention. We call this the - * Waker, and we'll cover it in a moment. */ - waker_fd = setup_waker(lguest_fd); + /* We clone off a thread, which wakes the Launcher whenever one of the + * input file descriptors needs attention. We call this the Waker, and + * we'll cover it in a moment. */ + setup_waker(lguest_fd); /* Finally, run the Guest. This doesn't return. */ run_guest(lguest_fd); diff --git a/Documentation/local_ops.txt b/Documentation/local_ops.txt index 4269a1105b3..f4f8b1c6c8b 100644 --- a/Documentation/local_ops.txt +++ b/Documentation/local_ops.txt @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ It can be done by slightly modifying the standard atomic operations : only their UP variant must be kept. It typically means removing LOCK prefix (on i386 and x86_64) and any SMP sychronization barrier. If the architecture does not have a different behavior between SMP and UP, including asm-generic/local.h -in your archtecture's local.h is sufficient. +in your architecture's local.h is sufficient. The local_t type is defined as an opaque signed long by embedding an atomic_long_t inside a structure. This is made so a cast from this type to a diff --git a/Documentation/moxa-smartio b/Documentation/moxa-smartio index fe24ecc6372..5337e80a5b9 100644 --- a/Documentation/moxa-smartio +++ b/Documentation/moxa-smartio @@ -1,14 +1,22 @@ ============================================================================= - - MOXA Smartio Family Device Driver Ver 1.1 Installation Guide - for Linux Kernel 2.2.x and 2.0.3x - Copyright (C) 1999, Moxa Technologies Co, Ltd. + MOXA Smartio/Industio Family Device Driver Installation Guide + for Linux Kernel 2.4.x, 2.6.x + Copyright (C) 2008, Moxa Inc. ============================================================================= +Date: 01/21/2008 + Content 1. Introduction 2. System Requirement 3. Installation + 3.1 Hardware installation + 3.2 Driver files + 3.3 Device naming convention + 3.4 Module driver configuration + 3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x and 2.6.x. + 3.6 Custom configuration + 3.7 Verify driver installation 4. Utilities 5. Setserial 6. Troubleshooting @@ -16,27 +24,48 @@ Content ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1. Introduction - The Smartio family Linux driver, Ver. 1.1, supports following multiport + The Smartio/Industio/UPCI family Linux driver supports following multiport boards. - -C104P/H/HS, C104H/PCI, C104HS/PCI, CI-104J 4 port multiport board. - -C168P/H/HS, C168H/PCI 8 port multiport board. - - This driver has been modified a little and cleaned up from the Moxa - contributed driver code and merged into Linux 2.2.14pre. In particular - official major/minor numbers have been assigned which are different to - those the original Moxa supplied driver used. + - 2 ports multiport board + CP-102U, CP-102UL, CP-102UF + CP-132U-I, CP-132UL, + CP-132, CP-132I, CP132S, CP-132IS, + CI-132, CI-132I, CI-132IS, + (C102H, C102HI, C102HIS, C102P, CP-102, CP-102S) + + - 4 ports multiport board + CP-104EL, + CP-104UL, CP-104JU, + CP-134U, CP-134U-I, + C104H/PCI, C104HS/PCI, + CP-114, CP-114I, CP-114S, CP-114IS, CP-114UL, + C104H, C104HS, + CI-104J, CI-104JS, + CI-134, CI-134I, CI-134IS, + (C114HI, CT-114I, C104P) + POS-104UL, + CB-114, + CB-134I + + - 8 ports multiport board + CP-118EL, CP-168EL, + CP-118U, CP-168U, + C168H/PCI, + C168H, C168HS, + (C168P), + CB-108 This driver and installation procedure have been developed upon Linux Kernel - 2.2.5 and backward compatible to 2.0.3x. This driver supports Intel x86 and - Alpha hardware platform. In order to maintain compatibility, this version - has also been properly tested with RedHat, OpenLinux, TurboLinux and - S.u.S.E Linux. However, if compatibility problem occurs, please contact - Moxa at support@moxa.com.tw. + 2.4.x and 2.6.x. This driver supports Intel x86 hardware platform. In order + to maintain compatibility, this version has also been properly tested with + RedHat, Mandrake, Fedora and S.u.S.E Linux. However, if compatibility problem + occurs, please contact Moxa at support@moxa.com.tw. In addition to device driver, useful utilities are also provided in this version. They are - - msdiag Diagnostic program for detecting installed Moxa Smartio boards. + - msdiag Diagnostic program for displaying installed Moxa + Smartio/Industio boards. - msmon Monitor program to observe data count and line status signals. - msterm A simple terminal program which is useful in testing serial ports. @@ -47,8 +76,7 @@ Content GNU General Public License in this version. Please refer to GNU General Public License announcement in each source code file for more detail. - In Moxa's ftp sites, you may always find latest driver at - ftp://ftp.moxa.com or ftp://ftp.moxa.com.tw. + In Moxa's Web sites, you may always find latest driver at http://web.moxa.com. This version of driver can be installed as Loadable Module (Module driver) or built-in into kernel (Static driver). You may refer to following @@ -61,8 +89,8 @@ Content ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2. System Requirement - - Hardware platform: Intel x86 or Alpha machine - - Kernel version: 2.0.3x or 2.2.x + - Hardware platform: Intel x86 machine + - Kernel version: 2.4.x or 2.6.x - gcc version 2.72 or later - Maximum 4 boards can be installed in combination @@ -70,9 +98,18 @@ Content 3. Installation 3.1 Hardware installation + 3.2 Driver files + 3.3 Device naming convention + 3.4 Module driver configuration + 3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x, 2.6.x. + 3.6 Custom configuration + 3.7 Verify driver installation + + + 3.1 Hardware installation - There are two types of buses, ISA and PCI, for Smartio family multiport - board. + There are two types of buses, ISA and PCI, for Smartio/Industio + family multiport board. ISA board --------- @@ -81,47 +118,57 @@ Content installation procedure in User's Manual before proceed any further. Please make sure the JP1 is open after the ISA board is set properly. - PCI board - --------- + PCI/UPCI board + -------------- You may need to adjust IRQ usage in BIOS to avoid from IRQ conflict with other ISA devices. Please refer to hardware installation procedure in User's Manual in advance. - IRQ Sharing + PCI IRQ Sharing ----------- Each port within the same multiport board shares the same IRQ. Up to - 4 Moxa Smartio Family multiport boards can be installed together on - one system and they can share the same IRQ. + 4 Moxa Smartio/Industio PCI Family multiport boards can be installed + together on one system and they can share the same IRQ. + - 3.2 Driver files and device naming convention + 3.2 Driver files The driver file may be obtained from ftp, CD-ROM or floppy disk. The first step, anyway, is to copy driver file "mxser.tgz" into specified directory. e.g. /moxa. The execute commands as below. + # cd / + # mkdir moxa # cd /moxa - # tar xvf /dev/fd0 + # tar xvf /dev/fd0 + or + + # cd / + # mkdir moxa # cd /moxa # cp /mnt/cdrom/<driver directory>/mxser.tgz . # tar xvfz mxser.tgz + + 3.3 Device naming convention + You may find all the driver and utilities files in /moxa/mxser. Following installation procedure depends on the model you'd like to - run the driver. If you prefer module driver, please refer to 3.3. - If static driver is required, please refer to 3.4. + run the driver. If you prefer module driver, please refer to 3.4. + If static driver is required, please refer to 3.5. Dialin and callout port ----------------------- - This driver remains traditional serial device properties. There're + This driver remains traditional serial device properties. There are two special file name for each serial port. One is dial-in port which is named "ttyMxx". For callout port, the naming convention is "cumxx". Device naming when more than 2 boards installed ----------------------------------------------- - Naming convention for each Smartio multiport board is pre-defined - as below. + Naming convention for each Smartio/Industio multiport board is + pre-defined as below. Board Num. Dial-in Port Callout port 1st board ttyM0 - ttyM7 cum0 - cum7 @@ -129,6 +176,12 @@ Content 3rd board ttyM16 - ttyM23 cum16 - cum23 4th board ttyM24 - ttym31 cum24 - cum31 + + !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! + Under Kernel 2.6 the cum Device is Obsolete. So use ttyM* + device instead. + !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! + Board sequence -------------- This driver will activate ISA boards according to the parameter set @@ -138,69 +191,131 @@ Content For PCI boards, their sequence will be after ISA boards and C168H/PCI has higher priority than C104H/PCI boards. - 3.3 Module driver configuration + 3.4 Module driver configuration Module driver is easiest way to install. If you prefer static driver installation, please skip this paragraph. - 1. Find "Makefile" in /moxa/mxser, then run - # make install + + ------------- Prepare to use the MOXA driver-------------------- + 3.4.1 Create tty device with correct major number + Before using MOXA driver, your system must have the tty devices + which are created with driver's major number. We offer one shell + script "msmknod" to simplify the procedure. + This step is only needed to be executed once. But you still + need to do this procedure when: + a. You change the driver's major number. Please refer the "3.7" + section. + b. Your total installed MOXA boards number is changed. Maybe you + add/delete one MOXA board. + c. You want to change the tty name. This needs to modify the + shell script "msmknod" + + The procedure is: + # cd /moxa/mxser/driver + # ./msmknod + + This shell script will require the major number for dial-in + device and callout device to create tty device. You also need + to specify the total installed MOXA board number. Default major + numbers for dial-in device and callout device are 30, 35. If + you need to change to other number, please refer section "3.7" + for more detailed procedure. + Msmknod will delete any special files occupying the same device + naming. + + 3.4.2 Build the MOXA driver and utilities + Before using the MOXA driver and utilities, you need compile the + all the source code. This step is only need to be executed once. + But you still re-compile the source code if you modify the source + code. For example, if you change the driver's major number (see + "3.7" section), then you need to do this step again. + + Find "Makefile" in /moxa/mxser, then run + + # make clean; make install + + !!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! + For Red Hat 9, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS3/ES3/WS3 & Fedora Core1: + # make clean; make installsp1 + + For Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS4/ES4/WS4: + # make clean; make installsp2 + !!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! The driver files "mxser.o" and utilities will be properly compiled - and copied to system directories respectively.Then run + and copied to system directories respectively. - # insmod mxser + ------------- Load MOXA driver-------------------- + 3.4.3 Load the MOXA driver - to activate the modular driver. You may run "lsmod" to check - if "mxser.o" is activated. + # modprobe mxser <argument> - 2. Create special files by executing "msmknod". - # cd /moxa/mxser/driver - # ./msmknod + will activate the module driver. You may run "lsmod" to check + if "mxser" is activated. If the MOXA board is ISA board, the + <argument> is needed. Please refer to section "3.4.5" for more + information. + + + ------------- Load MOXA driver on boot -------------------- + 3.4.4 For the above description, you may manually execute + "modprobe mxser" to activate this driver and run + "rmmod mxser" to remove it. + However, it's better to have a boot time configuration to + eliminate manual operation. Boot time configuration can be + achieved by rc file. We offer one "rc.mxser" file to simplify + the procedure under "moxa/mxser/driver". - Default major numbers for dial-in device and callout device are - 174, 175. Msmknod will delete any special files occupying the same - device naming. + But if you use ISA board, please modify the "modprobe ..." command + to add the argument (see "3.4.5" section). After modifying the + rc.mxser, please try to execute "/moxa/mxser/driver/rc.mxser" + manually to make sure the modification is ok. If any error + encountered, please try to modify again. If the modification is + completed, follow the below step. - 3. Up to now, you may manually execute "insmod mxser" to activate - this driver and run "rmmod mxser" to remove it. However, it's - better to have a boot time configuration to eliminate manual - operation. - Boot time configuration can be achieved by rc file. Run following - command for setting rc files. + Run following command for setting rc files. # cd /moxa/mxser/driver # cp ./rc.mxser /etc/rc.d # cd /etc/rc.d - You may have to modify part of the content in rc.mxser to specify - parameters for ISA board. Please refer to rc.mxser for more detail. - Find "rc.serial". If "rc.serial" doesn't exist, create it by vi. - Add "rc.mxser" in last line. Next, open rc.local by vi - and append following content. + Check "rc.serial" is existed or not. If "rc.serial" doesn't exist, + create it by vi, run "chmod 755 rc.serial" to change the permission. + Add "/etc/rc.d/rc.mxser" in last line, - if [ -f /etc/rc.d/rc.serial ]; then - sh /etc/rc.d/rc.serial - fi + Reboot and check if moxa.o activated by "lsmod" command. - 4. Reboot and check if mxser.o activated by "lsmod" command. - 5. If you'd like to drive Smartio ISA boards in the system, you'll - have to add parameter to specify CAP address of given board while - activating "mxser.o". The format for parameters are as follows. + 3.4.5. If you'd like to drive Smartio/Industio ISA boards in the system, + you'll have to add parameter to specify CAP address of given + board while activating "mxser.o". The format for parameters are + as follows. - insmod mxser ioaddr=0x???,0x???,0x???,0x??? + modprobe mxser ioaddr=0x???,0x???,0x???,0x??? | | | | | | | +- 4th ISA board | | +------ 3rd ISA board | +------------ 2nd ISA board +------------------- 1st ISA board - 3.4 Static driver configuration + 3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x and 2.6.x + + Note: To use static driver, you must install the linux kernel + source package. + + 3.5.1 Backup the built-in driver in the kernel. + # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char + # mv mxser.c mxser.c.old + + For Red Hat 7.x user, you need to create link: + # cd /usr/src + # ln -s linux-2.4 linux - 1. Create link + 3.5.2 Create link # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char # ln -s /moxa/mxser/driver/mxser.c mxser.c - 2. Add CAP address list for ISA boards + 3.5.3 Add CAP address list for ISA boards. For PCI boards user, + please skip this step. + In module mode, the CAP address for ISA board is given by parameter. In static driver configuration, you'll have to assign it within driver's source code. If you will not @@ -222,73 +337,55 @@ Content static int mxserBoardCAP[] = {0x280, 0x180, 0x00, 0x00}; - 3. Modify tty_io.c - # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char/ - # vi tty_io.c - Find pty_init(), insert "mxser_init()" as + 3.5.4 Setup kernel configuration - pty_init(); - mxser_init(); + Configure the kernel: - 4. Modify tty.h - # cd /usr/src/linux/include/linux - # vi tty.h - Find extern int tty_init(void), insert "mxser_init()" as + # cd /usr/src/linux + # make menuconfig - extern int tty_init(void); - extern int mxser_init(void); - - 5. Modify Makefile - # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char - # vi Makefile - Find L_OBJS := tty_io.o ...... random.o, add - "mxser.o" at last of this line as - L_OBJS := tty_io.o ....... mxser.o + You will go into a menu-driven system. Please select [Character + devices][Non-standard serial port support], enable the [Moxa + SmartIO support] driver with "[*]" for built-in (not "[M]"), then + select [Exit] to exit this program. - 6. Rebuild kernel - The following are for Linux kernel rebuilding,for your reference only. + 3.5.5 Rebuild kernel + The following are for Linux kernel rebuilding, for your + reference only. For appropriate details, please refer to the Linux document. - If 'lilo' utility is installed, please use 'make zlilo' to rebuild - kernel. If 'lilo' is not installed, please follow the following steps. - a. cd /usr/src/linux - b. make clean /* take a few minutes */ - c. make bzImage /* take probably 10-20 minutes */ - d. Backup original boot kernel. /* optional step */ - e. cp /usr/src/linux/arch/i386/boot/bzImage /boot/vmlinuz + b. make clean /* take a few minutes */ + c. make dep /* take a few minutes */ + d. make bzImage /* take probably 10-20 minutes */ + e. make install /* copy boot image to correct position */ f. Please make sure the boot kernel (vmlinuz) is in the - correct position. If you use 'lilo' utility, you should - check /etc/lilo.conf 'image' item specified the path - which is the 'vmlinuz' path, or you will load wrong - (or old) boot kernel image (vmlinuz). - g. chmod 400 /vmlinuz - h. lilo - i. rdev -R /vmlinuz 1 - j. sync - - Note that if the result of "make zImage" is ERROR, then you have to - go back to Linux configuration Setup. Type "make config" in directory - /usr/src/linux or "setup". - - Since system include file, /usr/src/linux/include/linux/interrupt.h, - is modified each time the MOXA driver is installed, kernel rebuilding - is inevitable. And it takes about 10 to 20 minutes depends on the - machine. - - 7. Make utility - # cd /moxa/mxser/utility - # make install - - 8. Make special file + correct position. + g. If you use 'lilo' utility, you should check /etc/lilo.conf + 'image' item specified the path which is the 'vmlinuz' path, + or you will load wrong (or old) boot kernel image (vmlinuz). + After checking /etc/lilo.conf, please run "lilo". + + Note that if the result of "make bzImage" is ERROR, then you have to + go back to Linux configuration Setup. Type "make menuconfig" in + directory /usr/src/linux. + + + 3.5.6 Make tty device and special file # cd /moxa/mxser/driver # ./msmknod - 9. Reboot + 3.5.7 Make utility + # cd /moxa/mxser/utility + # make clean; make install + + 3.5.8 Reboot - 3.5 Custom configuration + + + 3.6 Custom configuration Although this driver already provides you default configuration, you - still can change the device name and major number.The instruction to + still can change the device name and major number. The instruction to change these parameters are shown as below. Change Device name @@ -306,33 +403,37 @@ Content 2 free major numbers for this driver. There are 3 steps to change major numbers. - 1. Find free major numbers + 3.6.1 Find free major numbers In /proc/devices, you may find all the major numbers occupied in the system. Please select 2 major numbers that are available. e.g. 40, 45. - 2. Create special files + 3.6.2 Create special files Run /moxa/mxser/driver/msmknod to create special files with specified major numbers. - 3. Modify driver with new major number + 3.6.3 Modify driver with new major number Run vi to open /moxa/mxser/driver/mxser.c. Locate the line contains "MXSERMAJOR". Change the content as below. #define MXSERMAJOR 40 #define MXSERCUMAJOR 45 - 4. Run # make install in /moxa/mxser/driver. + 3.6.4 Run "make clean; make install" in /moxa/mxser/driver. - 3.6 Verify driver installation + 3.7 Verify driver installation You may refer to /var/log/messages to check the latest status log reported by this driver whenever it's activated. + ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4. Utilities There are 3 utilities contained in this driver. They are msdiag, msmon and msterm. These 3 utilities are released in form of source code. They should be compiled into executable file and copied into /usr/bin. + Before using these utilities, please load driver (refer 3.4 & 3.5) and + make sure you had run the "msmknod" utility. + msdiag - Diagnostic -------------------- - This utility provides the function to detect what Moxa Smartio multiport - board exists in the system. + This utility provides the function to display what Moxa Smartio/Industio + board found by driver in the system. msmon - Port Monitoring ----------------------- @@ -353,12 +454,13 @@ Content application, for example, sending AT command to a modem connected to the port or used as a terminal for login purpose. Note that this is only a dumb terminal emulation without handling full screen operation. + ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5. Setserial Supported Setserial parameters are listed as below. - uart set UART type(16450-->disable FIFO, 16550A-->enable FIFO) + uart set UART type(16450-->disable FIFO, 16550A-->enable FIFO) close_delay set the amount of time(in 1/100 of a second) that DTR should be kept low while being closed. closing_wait set the amount of time(in 1/100 of a second) that the @@ -366,7 +468,13 @@ Content being closed, before the receiver is disable. spd_hi Use 57.6kb when the application requests 38.4kb. spd_vhi Use 115.2kb when the application requests 38.4kb. + spd_shi Use 230.4kb when the application requests 38.4kb. + spd_warp Use 460.8kb when the application requests 38.4kb. spd_normal Use 38.4kb when the application requests 38.4kb. + spd_cust Use the custom divisor to set the speed when the + application requests 38.4kb. + divisor This option set the custom divison. + baud_base This option set the base baud rate. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6. Troubleshooting @@ -375,8 +483,9 @@ Content possible. If all the possible solutions fail, please contact our technical support team to get more help. - Error msg: More than 4 Moxa Smartio family boards found. Fifth board and - after are ignored. + + Error msg: More than 4 Moxa Smartio/Industio family boards found. Fifth board + and after are ignored. Solution: To avoid this problem, please unplug fifth and after board, because Moxa driver supports up to 4 boards. @@ -384,7 +493,7 @@ Content Error msg: Request_irq fail, IRQ(?) may be conflict with another device. Solution: Other PCI or ISA devices occupy the assigned IRQ. If you are not sure - which device causes the situation,please check /proc/interrupts to find + which device causes the situation, please check /proc/interrupts to find free IRQ and simply change another free IRQ for Moxa board. Error msg: Board #: C1xx Series(CAP=xxx) interrupt number invalid. @@ -397,15 +506,18 @@ Content Moxa ISA board needs an interrupt vector.Please refer to user's manual "Hardware Installation" chapter to set interrupt vector. - Error msg: Couldn't install MOXA Smartio family driver! + Error msg: Couldn't install MOXA Smartio/Industio family driver! Solution: Load Moxa driver fail, the major number may conflict with other devices. - Please refer to previous section 3.5 to change a free major number for + Please refer to previous section 3.7 to change a free major number for Moxa driver. - Error msg: Couldn't install MOXA Smartio family callout driver! + Error msg: Couldn't install MOXA Smartio/Industio family callout driver! Solution: Load Moxa callout driver fail, the callout device major number may - conflict with other devices. Please refer to previous section 3.5 to + conflict with other devices. Please refer to previous section 3.7 to change a free callout device major number for Moxa driver. + + ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + diff --git a/Documentation/networking/Makefile b/Documentation/networking/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6d8af1ac56c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built. +obj- := dummy.o + +# List of programs to build +hostprogs-y := ifenslave + +# Tell kbuild to always build the programs +always := $(hostprogs-y) diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt index 7fa7fe71d7a..688dfe1e6b7 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt @@ -631,7 +631,7 @@ xmit_hash_policy in environments where a layer3 gateway device is required to reach most destinations. - This algorithm is 802.3ad complient. + This algorithm is 802.3ad compliant. layer3+4 diff --git a/Documentation/networking/can.txt b/Documentation/networking/can.txt index 641d2afacff..297ba7b1cca 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/can.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/can.txt @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ solution for a couple of reasons: The Linux network devices (by default) just can handle the transmission and reception of media dependent frames. Due to the - arbritration on the CAN bus the transmission of a low prio CAN-ID + arbitration on the CAN bus the transmission of a low prio CAN-ID may be delayed by the reception of a high prio CAN frame. To reflect the correct* traffic on the node the loopback of the sent data has to be performed right after a successful transmission. If @@ -481,7 +481,7 @@ solution for a couple of reasons: - stats_timer: To calculate the Socket CAN core statistics (e.g. current/maximum frames per second) this 1 second timer is invoked at can.ko module start time by default. This timer can be - disabled by using stattimer=0 on the module comandline. + disabled by using stattimer=0 on the module commandline. - debug: (removed since SocketCAN SVN r546) diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c b/Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c index a1205988675..1b96ccda383 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c +++ b/Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c @@ -1081,7 +1081,7 @@ static int set_if_addr(char *master_ifname, char *slave_ifname) } - ipaddr = ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data; + ipaddr = (unsigned char *)ifr.ifr_addr.sa_data; v_print("Interface '%s': set IP %s to %d.%d.%d.%d\n", slave_ifname, ifra[i].desc, ipaddr[0], ipaddr[1], ipaddr[2], ipaddr[3]); diff --git a/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt b/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt index db0cd516958..07c53d59603 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt @@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ just one call to mmap is needed: mmap(0, size, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED, fd, 0); If tp_frame_size is a divisor of tp_block_size frames will be -contiguosly spaced by tp_frame_size bytes. If not, each +contiguously spaced by tp_frame_size bytes. If not, each tp_block_size/tp_frame_size frames there will be a gap between the frames. This is because a frame cannot be spawn across two blocks. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt b/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt index 01e716d185f..dcadf6f88e3 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt @@ -4,26 +4,27 @@ The "enviromental" rules for authors of any new tc actions are: 1) If you stealeth or borroweth any packet thou shalt be branching from the righteous path and thou shalt cloneth. -For example if your action queues a packet to be processed later -or intentionaly branches by redirecting a packet then you need to +For example if your action queues a packet to be processed later, +or intentionally branches by redirecting a packet, then you need to clone the packet. + There are certain fields in the skb tc_verd that need to be reset so we -avoid loops etc. A few are generic enough so much so that skb_act_clone() -resets them for you. So invoke skb_act_clone() rather than skb_clone() +avoid loops, etc. A few are generic enough that skb_act_clone() +resets them for you, so invoke skb_act_clone() rather than skb_clone(). 2) If you munge any packet thou shalt call pskb_expand_head in the case someone else is referencing the skb. After that you "own" the skb. You must also tell us if it is ok to munge the packet (TC_OK2MUNGE), this way any action downstream can stomp on the packet. -3) dropping packets you dont own is a nono. You simply return +3) Dropping packets you don't own is a no-no. You simply return TC_ACT_SHOT to the caller and they will drop it. The "enviromental" rules for callers of actions (qdiscs etc) are: -*) thou art responsible for freeing anything returned as being +*) Thou art responsible for freeing anything returned as being TC_ACT_SHOT/STOLEN/QUEUED. If none of TC_ACT_SHOT/STOLEN/QUEUED is -returned then all is great and you dont need to do anything. +returned, then all is great and you don't need to do anything. Post on netdev if something is unclear. diff --git a/Documentation/pcmcia/Makefile b/Documentation/pcmcia/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..accde871ae7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/pcmcia/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built. +obj- := dummy.o + +# List of programs to build +hostprogs-y := crc32hash + +# Tell kbuild to always build the programs +always := $(hostprogs-y) + +HOSTCFLAGS_crc32hash.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include diff --git a/Documentation/pcmcia/crc32hash.c b/Documentation/pcmcia/crc32hash.c index cbc36d299af..4210e5abab8 100644 --- a/Documentation/pcmcia/crc32hash.c +++ b/Documentation/pcmcia/crc32hash.c @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ int main(int argc, char **argv) { printf("no string passed as argument\n"); return -1; } - result = crc32(argv[1], strlen(argv[1])); + result = crc32((unsigned char const *)argv[1], strlen(argv[1])); printf("0x%x\n", result); return 0; } diff --git a/Documentation/power/00-INDEX b/Documentation/power/00-INDEX index a55d7f1c836..fb742c213c9 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/power/00-INDEX @@ -1,5 +1,7 @@ 00-INDEX - This file +apm-acpi.txt + - basic info about the APM and ACPI support. basic-pm-debugging.txt - Debugging suspend and resume devices.txt @@ -14,8 +16,6 @@ notifiers.txt - Registering suspend notifiers in device drivers pci.txt - How the PCI Subsystem Does Power Management -pm.txt - - info on Linux power management support. pm_qos_interface.txt - info on Linux PM Quality of Service interface power_supply_class.txt diff --git a/Documentation/power/apm-acpi.txt b/Documentation/power/apm-acpi.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1bd799dc17e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/power/apm-acpi.txt @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +APM or ACPI? +------------ +If you have a relatively recent x86 mobile, desktop, or server system, +odds are it supports either Advanced Power Management (APM) or +Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI). ACPI is the newer +of the two technologies and puts power management in the hands of the +operating system, allowing for more intelligent power management than +is possible with BIOS controlled APM. + +The best way to determine which, if either, your system supports is to +build a kernel with both ACPI and APM enabled (as of 2.3.x ACPI is +enabled by default). If a working ACPI implementation is found, the +ACPI driver will override and disable APM, otherwise the APM driver +will be used. + +No, sorry, you cannot have both ACPI and APM enabled and running at +once. Some people with broken ACPI or broken APM implementations +would like to use both to get a full set of working features, but you +simply cannot mix and match the two. Only one power management +interface can be in control of the machine at once. Think about it.. + +User-space Daemons +------------------ +Both APM and ACPI rely on user-space daemons, apmd and acpid +respectively, to be completely functional. Obtain both of these +daemons from your Linux distribution or from the Internet (see below) +and be sure that they are started sometime in the system boot process. +Go ahead and start both. If ACPI or APM is not available on your +system the associated daemon will exit gracefully. + + apmd: http://worldvisions.ca/~apenwarr/apmd/ + acpid: http://acpid.sf.net/ diff --git a/Documentation/power/pm.txt b/Documentation/power/pm.txt deleted file mode 100644 index be841507e43..00000000000 --- a/Documentation/power/pm.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,257 +0,0 @@ - Linux Power Management Support - -This document briefly describes how to use power management with your -Linux system and how to add power management support to Linux drivers. - -APM or ACPI? ------------- -If you have a relatively recent x86 mobile, desktop, or server system, -odds are it supports either Advanced Power Management (APM) or -Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI). ACPI is the newer -of the two technologies and puts power management in the hands of the -operating system, allowing for more intelligent power management than -is possible with BIOS controlled APM. - -The best way to determine which, if either, your system supports is to -build a kernel with both ACPI and APM enabled (as of 2.3.x ACPI is -enabled by default). If a working ACPI implementation is found, the -ACPI driver will override and disable APM, otherwise the APM driver -will be used. - -No, sorry, you cannot have both ACPI and APM enabled and running at -once. Some people with broken ACPI or broken APM implementations -would like to use both to get a full set of working features, but you -simply cannot mix and match the two. Only one power management -interface can be in control of the machine at once. Think about it.. - -User-space Daemons ------------------- -Both APM and ACPI rely on user-space daemons, apmd and acpid -respectively, to be completely functional. Obtain both of these -daemons from your Linux distribution or from the Internet (see below) -and be sure that they are started sometime in the system boot process. -Go ahead and start both. If ACPI or APM is not available on your -system the associated daemon will exit gracefully. - - apmd: http://worldvisions.ca/~apenwarr/apmd/ - acpid: http://acpid.sf.net/ - -Driver Interface -- OBSOLETE, DO NOT USE! -----------------************************* - -Note: pm_register(), pm_access(), pm_dev_idle() and friends are -obsolete. Please do not use them. Instead you should properly hook -your driver into the driver model, and use its suspend()/resume() -callbacks to do this kind of stuff. - -If you are writing a new driver or maintaining an old driver, it -should include power management support. Without power management -support, a single driver may prevent a system with power management -capabilities from ever being able to suspend (safely). - -Overview: -1) Register each instance of a device with "pm_register" -2) Call "pm_access" before accessing the hardware. - (this will ensure that the hardware is awake and ready) -3) Your "pm_callback" is called before going into a - suspend state (ACPI D1-D3) or after resuming (ACPI D0) - from a suspend. -4) Call "pm_dev_idle" when the device is not being used - (optional but will improve device idle detection) -5) When unloaded, unregister the device with "pm_unregister" - -/* - * Description: Register a device with the power-management subsystem - * - * Parameters: - * type - device type (PCI device, system device, ...) - * id - instance number or unique identifier - * cback - request handler callback (suspend, resume, ...) - * - * Returns: Registered PM device or NULL on error - * - * Examples: - * dev = pm_register(PM_SYS_DEV, PM_SYS_VGA, vga_callback); - * - * struct pci_dev *pci_dev = pci_find_dev(...); - * dev = pm_register(PM_PCI_DEV, PM_PCI_ID(pci_dev), callback); - */ -struct pm_dev *pm_register(pm_dev_t type, unsigned long id, pm_callback cback); - -/* - * Description: Unregister a device with the power management subsystem - * - * Parameters: - * dev - PM device previously returned from pm_register - */ -void pm_unregister(struct pm_dev *dev); - -/* - * Description: Unregister all devices with a matching callback function - * - * Parameters: - * cback - previously registered request callback - * - * Notes: Provided for easier porting from old APM interface - */ -void pm_unregister_all(pm_callback cback); - -/* - * Power management request callback - * - * Parameters: - * dev - PM device previously returned from pm_register - * rqst - request type - * data - data, if any, associated with the request - * - * Returns: 0 if the request is successful - * EINVAL if the request is not supported - * EBUSY if the device is now busy and cannot handle the request - * ENOMEM if the device was unable to handle the request due to memory - * - * Details: The device request callback will be called before the - * device/system enters a suspend state (ACPI D1-D3) or - * or after the device/system resumes from suspend (ACPI D0). - * For PM_SUSPEND, the ACPI D-state being entered is passed - * as the "data" argument to the callback. The device - * driver should save (PM_SUSPEND) or restore (PM_RESUME) - * device context when the request callback is called. - * - * Once a driver returns 0 (success) from a suspend - * request, it should not process any further requests or - * access the device hardware until a call to "pm_access" is made. - */ -typedef int (*pm_callback)(struct pm_dev *dev, pm_request_t rqst, void *data); - -Driver Details --------------- -This is just a quick Q&A as a stopgap until a real driver writers' -power management guide is available. - -Q: When is a device suspended? - -Devices can be suspended based on direct user request (eg. laptop lid -closes), system power policy (eg. sleep after 30 minutes of console -inactivity), or device power policy (eg. power down device after 5 -minutes of inactivity) - -Q: Must a driver honor a suspend request? - -No, a driver can return -EBUSY from a suspend request and this -will stop the system from suspending. When a suspend request -fails, all suspended devices are resumed and the system continues -to run. Suspend can be retried at a later time. - -Q: Can the driver block suspend/resume requests? - -Yes, a driver can delay its return from a suspend or resume -request until the device is ready to handle requests. It -is advantageous to return as quickly as possible from a -request as suspend/resume are done serially. - -Q: What context is a suspend/resume initiated from? - -A suspend or resume is initiated from a kernel thread context. -It is safe to block, allocate memory, initiate requests -or anything else you can do within the kernel. - -Q: Will requests continue to arrive after a suspend? - -Possibly. It is the driver's responsibility to queue(*), -fail, or drop any requests that arrive after returning -success to a suspend request. It is important that the -driver not access its device until after it receives -a resume request as the device's bus may no longer -be active. - -(*) If a driver queues requests for processing after - resume be aware that the device, network, etc. - might be in a different state than at suspend time. - It's probably better to drop requests unless - the driver is a storage device. - -Q: Do I have to manage bus-specific power management registers - -No. It is the responsibility of the bus driver to manage -PCI, USB, etc. power management registers. The bus driver -or the power management subsystem will also enable any -wake-on functionality that the device has. - -Q: So, really, what do I need to do to support suspend/resume? - -You need to save any device context that would -be lost if the device was powered off and then restore -it at resume time. When ACPI is active, there are -three levels of device suspend states; D1, D2, and D3. -(The suspend state is passed as the "data" argument -to the device callback.) With D3, the device is powered -off and loses all context, D1 and D2 are shallower power -states and require less device context to be saved. To -play it safe, just save everything at suspend and restore -everything at resume. - -Q: Where do I store device context for suspend? - -Anywhere in memory, kmalloc a buffer or store it -in the device descriptor. You are guaranteed that the -contents of memory will be restored and accessible -before resume, even when the system suspends to disk. - -Q: What do I need to do for ACPI vs. APM vs. etc? - -Drivers need not be aware of the specific power management -technology that is active. They just need to be aware -of when the overlying power management system requests -that they suspend or resume. - -Q: What about device dependencies? - -When a driver registers a device, the power management -subsystem uses the information provided to build a -tree of device dependencies (eg. USB device X is on -USB controller Y which is on PCI bus Z) When power -management wants to suspend a device, it first sends -a suspend request to its driver, then the bus driver, -and so on up to the system bus. Device resumes -proceed in the opposite direction. - -Q: Who do I contact for additional information about - enabling power management for my specific driver/device? - -ACPI Development mailing list: linux-acpi@vger.kernel.org - -System Interface -- OBSOLETE, DO NOT USE! -----------------************************* -If you are providing new power management support to Linux (ie. -adding support for something like APM or ACPI), you should -communicate with drivers through the existing generic power -management interface. - -/* - * Send a request to all devices - * - * Parameters: - * rqst - request type - * data - data, if any, associated with the request - * - * Returns: 0 if the request is successful - * See "pm_callback" return for errors - * - * Details: Walk list of registered devices and call pm_send - * for each until complete or an error is encountered. - * If an error is encountered for a suspend request, - * return all devices to the state they were in before - * the suspend request. - */ -int pm_send_all(pm_request_t rqst, void *data); - -/* - * Find a matching device - * - * Parameters: - * type - device type (PCI device, system device, or 0 to match all devices) - * from - previous match or NULL to start from the beginning - * - * Returns: Matching device or NULL if none found - */ -struct pm_dev *pm_find(pm_dev_t type, struct pm_dev *from); diff --git a/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt b/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt index 49adb1a3351..c40866e8b95 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -PM quality of Service interface. +PM Quality Of Service Interface. This interface provides a kernel and user mode interface for registering performance expectations by drivers, subsystems and user space applications on @@ -7,6 +7,11 @@ one of the parameters. Currently we have {cpu_dma_latency, network_latency, network_throughput} as the initial set of pm_qos parameters. +Each parameters have defined units: + * latency: usec + * timeout: usec + * throughput: kbs (kilo bit / sec) + The infrastructure exposes multiple misc device nodes one per implemented parameter. The set of parameters implement is defined by pm_qos_power_init() and pm_qos_params.h. This is done because having the available parameters diff --git a/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt b/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt index a8686e5a685..c6cd4956047 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/power_supply_class.txt @@ -101,6 +101,10 @@ of charge when battery became full/empty". It also could mean "value of charge when battery considered full/empty at given conditions (temperature, age)". I.e. these attributes represents real thresholds, not design values. +CHARGE_COUNTER - the current charge counter (in µAh). This could easily +be negative; there is no empty or full value. It is only useful for +relative, time-based measurements. + ENERGY_FULL, ENERGY_EMPTY - same as above but for energy. CAPACITY - capacity in percents. diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/consumer.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/consumer.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..82b7a43aadb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/consumer.txt @@ -0,0 +1,182 @@ +Regulator Consumer Driver Interface +=================================== + +This text describes the regulator interface for consumer device drivers. +Please see overview.txt for a description of the terms used in this text. + + +1. Consumer Regulator Access (static & dynamic drivers) +======================================================= + +A consumer driver can get access to it's supply regulator by calling :- + +regulator = regulator_get(dev, "Vcc"); + +The consumer passes in it's struct device pointer and power supply ID. The core +then finds the correct regulator by consulting a machine specific lookup table. +If the lookup is successful then this call will return a pointer to the struct +regulator that supplies this consumer. + +To release the regulator the consumer driver should call :- + +regulator_put(regulator); + +Consumers can be supplied by more than one regulator e.g. codec consumer with +analog and digital supplies :- + +digital = regulator_get(dev, "Vcc"); /* digital core */ +analog = regulator_get(dev, "Avdd"); /* analog */ + +The regulator access functions regulator_get() and regulator_put() will +usually be called in your device drivers probe() and remove() respectively. + + +2. Regulator Output Enable & Disable (static & dynamic drivers) +==================================================================== + +A consumer can enable it's power supply by calling:- + +int regulator_enable(regulator); + +NOTE: The supply may already be enabled before regulator_enabled() is called. +This may happen if the consumer shares the regulator or the regulator has been +previously enabled by bootloader or kernel board initialization code. + +A consumer can determine if a regulator is enabled by calling :- + +int regulator_is_enabled(regulator); + +This will return > zero when the regulator is enabled. + + +A consumer can disable it's supply when no longer needed by calling :- + +int regulator_disable(regulator); + +NOTE: This may not disable the supply if it's shared with other consumers. The +regulator will only be disabled when the enabled reference count is zero. + +Finally, a regulator can be forcefully disabled in the case of an emergency :- + +int regulator_force_disable(regulator); + +NOTE: this will immediately and forcefully shutdown the regulator output. All +consumers will be powered off. + + +3. Regulator Voltage Control & Status (dynamic drivers) +====================================================== + +Some consumer drivers need to be able to dynamically change their supply +voltage to match system operating points. e.g. CPUfreq drivers can scale +voltage along with frequency to save power, SD drivers may need to select the +correct card voltage, etc. + +Consumers can control their supply voltage by calling :- + +int regulator_set_voltage(regulator, min_uV, max_uV); + +Where min_uV and max_uV are the minimum and maximum acceptable voltages in +microvolts. + +NOTE: this can be called when the regulator is enabled or disabled. If called +when enabled, then the voltage changes instantly, otherwise the voltage +configuration changes and the voltage is physically set when the regulator is +next enabled. + +The regulators configured voltage output can be found by calling :- + +int regulator_get_voltage(regulator); + +NOTE: get_voltage() will return the configured output voltage whether the +regulator is enabled or disabled and should NOT be used to determine regulator +output state. However this can be used in conjunction with is_enabled() to +determine the regulator physical output voltage. + + +4. Regulator Current Limit Control & Status (dynamic drivers) +=========================================================== + +Some consumer drivers need to be able to dynamically change their supply +current limit to match system operating points. e.g. LCD backlight driver can +change the current limit to vary the backlight brightness, USB drivers may want +to set the limit to 500mA when supplying power. + +Consumers can control their supply current limit by calling :- + +int regulator_set_current_limit(regulator, min_uV, max_uV); + +Where min_uA and max_uA are the minimum and maximum acceptable current limit in +microamps. + +NOTE: this can be called when the regulator is enabled or disabled. If called +when enabled, then the current limit changes instantly, otherwise the current +limit configuration changes and the current limit is physically set when the +regulator is next enabled. + +A regulators current limit can be found by calling :- + +int regulator_get_current_limit(regulator); + +NOTE: get_current_limit() will return the current limit whether the regulator +is enabled or disabled and should not be used to determine regulator current +load. + + +5. Regulator Operating Mode Control & Status (dynamic drivers) +============================================================= + +Some consumers can further save system power by changing the operating mode of +their supply regulator to be more efficient when the consumers operating state +changes. e.g. consumer driver is idle and subsequently draws less current + +Regulator operating mode can be changed indirectly or directly. + +Indirect operating mode control. +-------------------------------- +Consumer drivers can request a change in their supply regulator operating mode +by calling :- + +int regulator_set_optimum_mode(struct regulator *regulator, int load_uA); + +This will cause the core to recalculate the total load on the regulator (based +on all it's consumers) and change operating mode (if necessary and permitted) +to best match the current operating load. + +The load_uA value can be determined from the consumers datasheet. e.g.most +datasheets have tables showing the max current consumed in certain situations. + +Most consumers will use indirect operating mode control since they have no +knowledge of the regulator or whether the regulator is shared with other +consumers. + +Direct operating mode control. +------------------------------ +Bespoke or tightly coupled drivers may want to directly control regulator +operating mode depending on their operating point. This can be achieved by +calling :- + +int regulator_set_mode(struct regulator *regulator, unsigned int mode); +unsigned int regulator_get_mode(struct regulator *regulator); + +Direct mode will only be used by consumers that *know* about the regulator and +are not sharing the regulator with other consumers. + + +6. Regulator Events +=================== +Regulators can notify consumers of external events. Events could be received by +consumers under regulator stress or failure conditions. + +Consumers can register interest in regulator events by calling :- + +int regulator_register_notifier(struct regulator *regulator, + struct notifier_block *nb); + +Consumers can uregister interest by calling :- + +int regulator_unregister_notifier(struct regulator *regulator, + struct notifier_block *nb); + +Regulators use the kernel notifier framework to send event to thier interested +consumers. diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c9a35665cf7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +Regulator Machine Driver Interface +=================================== + +The regulator machine driver interface is intended for board/machine specific +initialisation code to configure the regulator subsystem. Typical things that +machine drivers would do are :- + + 1. Regulator -> Device mapping. + 2. Regulator supply configuration. + 3. Power Domain constraint setting. + + + +1. Regulator -> device mapping +============================== +Consider the following machine :- + + Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V] + | + +-> [Consumer B @ 3.3V] + +The drivers for consumers A & B must be mapped to the correct regulator in +order to control their power supply. This mapping can be achieved in machine +initialisation code by calling :- + +int regulator_set_device_supply(const char *regulator, struct device *dev, + const char *supply); + +and is shown with the following code :- + +regulator_set_device_supply("Regulator-1", devB, "Vcc"); +regulator_set_device_supply("Regulator-2", devA, "Vcc"); + +This maps Regulator-1 to the 'Vcc' supply for Consumer B and maps Regulator-2 +to the 'Vcc' supply for Consumer A. + + +2. Regulator supply configuration. +================================== +Consider the following machine (again) :- + + Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V] + | + +-> [Consumer B @ 3.3V] + +Regulator-1 supplies power to Regulator-2. This relationship must be registered +with the core so that Regulator-1 is also enabled when Consumer A enables it's +supply (Regulator-2). + +This relationship can be register with the core via :- + +int regulator_set_supply(const char *regulator, const char *regulator_supply); + +In this example we would use the following code :- + +regulator_set_supply("Regulator-2", "Regulator-1"); + +Relationships can be queried by calling :- + +const char *regulator_get_supply(const char *regulator); + + +3. Power Domain constraint setting. +=================================== +Each power domain within a system has physical constraints on voltage and +current. This must be defined in software so that the power domain is always +operated within specifications. + +Consider the following machine (again) :- + + Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 --> [Consumer A @ 1.8 - 2.0V] + | + +-> [Consumer B @ 3.3V] + +This gives us two regulators and two power domains: + + Domain 1: Regulator-2, Consumer B. + Domain 2: Consumer A. + +Constraints can be registered by calling :- + +int regulator_set_platform_constraints(const char *regulator, + struct regulation_constraints *constraints); + +The example is defined as follows :- + +struct regulation_constraints domain_1 = { + .min_uV = 3300000, + .max_uV = 3300000, + .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL, +}; + +struct regulation_constraints domain_2 = { + .min_uV = 1800000, + .max_uV = 2000000, + .valid_ops_mask = REGULATOR_CHANGE_VOLTAGE, + .valid_modes_mask = REGULATOR_MODE_NORMAL, +}; + +regulator_set_platform_constraints("Regulator-1", &domain_1); +regulator_set_platform_constraints("Regulator-2", &domain_2); diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/overview.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/overview.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bdcb332bd7f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/overview.txt @@ -0,0 +1,171 @@ +Linux voltage and current regulator framework +============================================= + +About +===== + +This framework is designed to provide a standard kernel interface to control +voltage and current regulators. + +The intention is to allow systems to dynamically control regulator power output +in order to save power and prolong battery life. This applies to both voltage +regulators (where voltage output is controllable) and current sinks (where +current limit is controllable). + +(C) 2008 Wolfson Microelectronics PLC. +Author: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> + + +Nomenclature +============ + +Some terms used in this document:- + + o Regulator - Electronic device that supplies power to other devices. + Most regulators can enable and disable their output whilst + some can control their output voltage and or current. + + Input Voltage -> Regulator -> Output Voltage + + + o PMIC - Power Management IC. An IC that contains numerous regulators + and often contains other susbsystems. + + + o Consumer - Electronic device that is supplied power by a regulator. + Consumers can be classified into two types:- + + Static: consumer does not change it's supply voltage or + current limit. It only needs to enable or disable it's + power supply. It's supply voltage is set by the hardware, + bootloader, firmware or kernel board initialisation code. + + Dynamic: consumer needs to change it's supply voltage or + current limit to meet operation demands. + + + o Power Domain - Electronic circuit that is supplied it's input power by the + output power of a regulator, switch or by another power + domain. + + The supply regulator may be behind a switch(s). i.e. + + Regulator -+-> Switch-1 -+-> Switch-2 --> [Consumer A] + | | + | +-> [Consumer B], [Consumer C] + | + +-> [Consumer D], [Consumer E] + + That is one regulator and three power domains: + + Domain 1: Switch-1, Consumers D & E. + Domain 2: Switch-2, Consumers B & C. + Domain 3: Consumer A. + + and this represents a "supplies" relationship: + + Domain-1 --> Domain-2 --> Domain-3. + + A power domain may have regulators that are supplied power + by other regulators. i.e. + + Regulator-1 -+-> Regulator-2 -+-> [Consumer A] + | + +-> [Consumer B] + + This gives us two regulators and two power domains: + + Domain 1: Regulator-2, Consumer B. + Domain 2: Consumer A. + + and a "supplies" relationship: + + Domain-1 --> Domain-2 + + + o Constraints - Constraints are used to define power levels for performance + and hardware protection. Constraints exist at three levels: + + Regulator Level: This is defined by the regulator hardware + operating parameters and is specified in the regulator + datasheet. i.e. + + - voltage output is in the range 800mV -> 3500mV. + - regulator current output limit is 20mA @ 5V but is + 10mA @ 10V. + + Power Domain Level: This is defined in software by kernel + level board initialisation code. It is used to constrain a + power domain to a particular power range. i.e. + + - Domain-1 voltage is 3300mV + - Domain-2 voltage is 1400mV -> 1600mV + - Domain-3 current limit is 0mA -> 20mA. + + Consumer Level: This is defined by consumer drivers + dynamically setting voltage or current limit levels. + + e.g. a consumer backlight driver asks for a current increase + from 5mA to 10mA to increase LCD illumination. This passes + to through the levels as follows :- + + Consumer: need to increase LCD brightness. Lookup and + request next current mA value in brightness table (the + consumer driver could be used on several different + personalities based upon the same reference device). + + Power Domain: is the new current limit within the domain + operating limits for this domain and system state (e.g. + battery power, USB power) + + Regulator Domains: is the new current limit within the + regulator operating parameters for input/ouput voltage. + + If the regulator request passes all the constraint tests + then the new regulator value is applied. + + +Design +====== + +The framework is designed and targeted at SoC based devices but may also be +relevant to non SoC devices and is split into the following four interfaces:- + + + 1. Consumer driver interface. + + This uses a similar API to the kernel clock interface in that consumer + drivers can get and put a regulator (like they can with clocks atm) and + get/set voltage, current limit, mode, enable and disable. This should + allow consumers complete control over their supply voltage and current + limit. This also compiles out if not in use so drivers can be reused in + systems with no regulator based power control. + + See Documentation/power/regulator/consumer.txt + + 2. Regulator driver interface. + + This allows regulator drivers to register their regulators and provide + operations to the core. It also has a notifier call chain for propagating + regulator events to clients. + + See Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt + + 3. Machine interface. + + This interface is for machine specific code and allows the creation of + voltage/current domains (with constraints) for each regulator. It can + provide regulator constraints that will prevent device damage through + overvoltage or over current caused by buggy client drivers. It also + allows the creation of a regulator tree whereby some regulators are + supplied by others (similar to a clock tree). + + See Documentation/power/regulator/machine.txt + + 4. Userspace ABI. + + The framework also exports a lot of useful voltage/current/opmode data to + userspace via sysfs. This could be used to help monitor device power + consumption and status. + + See Documentation/ABI/testing/regulator-sysfs.txt diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a6905014359 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/regulator.txt @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +Regulator Driver Interface +========================== + +The regulator driver interface is relatively simple and designed to allow +regulator drivers to register their services with the core framework. + + +Registration +============ + +Drivers can register a regulator by calling :- + +struct regulator_dev *regulator_register(struct regulator_desc *regulator_desc, + void *reg_data); + +This will register the regulators capabilities and operations the regulator +core. The core does not touch reg_data (private to regulator driver). + +Regulators can be unregistered by calling :- + +void regulator_unregister(struct regulator_dev *rdev); + + +Regulator Events +================ +Regulators can send events (e.g. over temp, under voltage, etc) to consumer +drivers by calling :- + +int regulator_notifier_call_chain(struct regulator_dev *rdev, + unsigned long event, void *data); diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX index 3be84aa38df..29d839ce732 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX @@ -20,8 +20,6 @@ mpc52xx-device-tree-bindings.txt - MPC5200 Device Tree Bindings ppc_htab.txt - info about the Linux/PPC /proc/ppc_htab entry -SBC8260_memory_mapping.txt - - EST SBC8260 board info smp.txt - use and state info about Linux/PPC on MP machines sound.txt diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/SBC8260_memory_mapping.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/SBC8260_memory_mapping.txt deleted file mode 100644 index e6e9ee0506c..00000000000 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/SBC8260_memory_mapping.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,197 +0,0 @@ -Please mail me (Jon Diekema, diekema_jon@si.com or diekema@cideas.com) -if you have questions, comments or corrections. - - * EST SBC8260 Linux memory mapping rules - - http://www.estc.com/ - http://www.estc.com/products/boards/SBC8260-8240_ds.html - - Initial conditions: - ------------------- - - Tasks that need to be perform by the boot ROM before control is - transferred to zImage (compressed Linux kernel): - - - Define the IMMR to 0xf0000000 - - - Initialize the memory controller so that RAM is available at - physical address 0x00000000. On the SBC8260 is this 16M (64M) - SDRAM. - - - The boot ROM should only clear the RAM that it is using. - - The reason for doing this is to enhances the chances of a - successful post mortem on a Linux panic. One of the first - items to examine is the 16k (LOG_BUF_LEN) circular console - buffer called log_buf which is defined in kernel/printk.c. - - - To enhance boot ROM performance, the I-cache can be enabled. - - Date: Mon, 22 May 2000 14:21:10 -0700 - From: Neil Russell <caret@c-side.com> - - LiMon (LInux MONitor) runs with and starts Linux with MMU - off, I-cache enabled, D-cache disabled. The I-cache doesn't - need hints from the MMU to work correctly as the D-cache - does. No D-cache means no special code to handle devices in - the presence of cache (no snooping, etc). The use of the - I-cache means that the monitor can run acceptably fast - directly from ROM, rather than having to copy it to RAM. - - - Build the board information structure (see - include/asm-ppc/est8260.h for its definition) - - - The compressed Linux kernel (zImage) contains a bootstrap loader - that is position independent; you can load it into any RAM, - ROM or FLASH memory address >= 0x00500000 (above 5 MB), or - at its link address of 0x00400000 (4 MB). - - Note: If zImage is loaded at its link address of 0x00400000 (4 MB), - then zImage will skip the step of moving itself to - its link address. - - - Load R3 with the address of the board information structure - - - Transfer control to zImage - - - The Linux console port is SMC1, and the baud rate is controlled - from the bi_baudrate field of the board information structure. - On thing to keep in mind when picking the baud rate, is that - there is no flow control on the SMC ports. I would stick - with something safe and standard like 19200. - - On the EST SBC8260, the SMC1 port is on the COM1 connector of - the board. - - - EST SBC8260 defaults: - --------------------- - - Chip - Memory Sel Bus Use - --------------------- --- --- ---------------------------------- - 0x00000000-0x03FFFFFF CS2 60x (16M or 64M)/64M SDRAM - 0x04000000-0x04FFFFFF CS4 local 4M/16M SDRAM (soldered to the board) - 0x21000000-0x21000000 CS7 60x 1B/64K Flash present detect (from the flash SIMM) - 0x21000001-0x21000001 CS7 60x 1B/64K Switches (read) and LEDs (write) - 0x22000000-0x2200FFFF CS5 60x 8K/64K EEPROM - 0xFC000000-0xFCFFFFFF CS6 60x 2M/16M flash (8 bits wide, soldered to the board) - 0xFE000000-0xFFFFFFFF CS0 60x 4M/16M flash (SIMM) - - Notes: - ------ - - - The chip selects can map 32K blocks and up (powers of 2) - - - The SDRAM machine can handled up to 128Mbytes per chip select - - - Linux uses the 60x bus memory (the SDRAM DIMM) for the - communications buffers. - - - BATs can map 128K-256Mbytes each. There are four data BATs and - four instruction BATs. Generally the data and instruction BATs - are mapped the same. - - - The IMMR must be set above the kernel virtual memory addresses, - which start at 0xC0000000. Otherwise, the kernel may crash as - soon as you start any threads or processes due to VM collisions - in the kernel or user process space. - - - Details from Dan Malek <dan_malek@mvista.com> on 10/29/1999: - - The user application virtual space consumes the first 2 Gbytes - (0x00000000 to 0x7FFFFFFF). The kernel virtual text starts at - 0xC0000000, with data following. There is a "protection hole" - between the end of kernel data and the start of the kernel - dynamically allocated space, but this space is still within - 0xCxxxxxxx. - - Obviously the kernel can't map any physical addresses 1:1 in - these ranges. - - - Details from Dan Malek <dan_malek@mvista.com> on 5/19/2000: - - During the early kernel initialization, the kernel virtual - memory allocator is not operational. Prior to this KVM - initialization, we choose to map virtual to physical addresses - 1:1. That is, the kernel virtual address exactly matches the - physical address on the bus. These mappings are typically done - in arch/ppc/kernel/head.S, or arch/ppc/mm/init.c. Only - absolutely necessary mappings should be done at this time, for - example board control registers or a serial uart. Normal device - driver initialization should map resources later when necessary. - - Although platform dependent, and certainly the case for embedded - 8xx, traditionally memory is mapped at physical address zero, - and I/O devices above physical address 0x80000000. The lowest - and highest (above 0xf0000000) I/O addresses are traditionally - used for devices or registers we need to map during kernel - initialization and prior to KVM operation. For this reason, - and since it followed prior PowerPC platform examples, I chose - to map the embedded 8xx kernel to the 0xc0000000 virtual address. - This way, we can enable the MMU to map the kernel for proper - operation, and still map a few windows before the KVM is operational. - - On some systems, you could possibly run the kernel at the - 0x80000000 or any other virtual address. It just depends upon - mapping that must be done prior to KVM operational. You can never - map devices or kernel spaces that overlap with the user virtual - space. This is why default IMMR mapping used by most BDM tools - won't work. They put the IMMR at something like 0x10000000 or - 0x02000000 for example. You simply can't map these addresses early - in the kernel, and continue proper system operation. - - The embedded 8xx/82xx kernel is mature enough that all you should - need to do is map the IMMR someplace at or above 0xf0000000 and it - should boot far enough to get serial console messages and KGDB - connected on any platform. There are lots of other subtle memory - management design features that you simply don't need to worry - about. If you are changing functions related to MMU initialization, - you are likely breaking things that are known to work and are - heading down a path of disaster and frustration. Your changes - should be to make the flexibility of the processor fit Linux, - not force arbitrary and non-workable memory mappings into Linux. - - - You don't want to change KERNELLOAD or KERNELBASE, otherwise the - virtual memory and MMU code will get confused. - - arch/ppc/Makefile:KERNELLOAD = 0xc0000000 - - include/asm-ppc/page.h:#define PAGE_OFFSET 0xc0000000 - include/asm-ppc/page.h:#define KERNELBASE PAGE_OFFSET - - - RAM is at physical address 0x00000000, and gets mapped to - virtual address 0xC0000000 for the kernel. - - - Physical addresses used by the Linux kernel: - -------------------------------------------- - - 0x00000000-0x3FFFFFFF 1GB reserved for RAM - 0xF0000000-0xF001FFFF 128K IMMR 64K used for dual port memory, - 64K for 8260 registers - - - Logical addresses used by the Linux kernel: - ------------------------------------------- - - 0xF0000000-0xFFFFFFFF 256M BAT0 (IMMR: dual port RAM, registers) - 0xE0000000-0xEFFFFFFF 256M BAT1 (I/O space for custom boards) - 0xC0000000-0xCFFFFFFF 256M BAT2 (RAM) - 0xD0000000-0xDFFFFFFF 256M BAT3 (if RAM > 256MByte) - - - EST SBC8260 Linux mapping: - -------------------------- - - DBAT0, IBAT0, cache inhibited: - - Chip - Memory Sel Use - --------------------- --- --------------------------------- - 0xF0000000-0xF001FFFF n/a IMMR: dual port RAM, registers - - DBAT1, IBAT1, cache inhibited: - diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt index ea1b70b3579..de4063cb4fd 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt @@ -59,6 +59,7 @@ Table of Contents p) Freescale Synchronous Serial Interface q) USB EHCI controllers r) MDIO on GPIOs + s) SPI busses VII - Marvell Discovery mv64[345]6x System Controller chips 1) The /system-controller node @@ -277,7 +278,7 @@ it with special cases. a 64-bit platform. d) request and get assigned a platform number (see PLATFORM_* - constants in include/asm-powerpc/processor.h + constants in arch/powerpc/include/asm/processor.h 32-bit embedded kernels: @@ -339,7 +340,7 @@ the block to RAM before passing it to the kernel. --------- The kernel is entered with r3 pointing to an area of memory that is - roughly described in include/asm-powerpc/prom.h by the structure + roughly described in arch/powerpc/include/asm/prom.h by the structure boot_param_header: struct boot_param_header { @@ -707,7 +708,7 @@ device or bus to be described by the device tree. In general, the format of an address for a device is defined by the parent bus type, based on the #address-cells and #size-cells properties. Note that the parent's parent definitions of #address-cells -and #size-cells are not inhereted so every node with children must specify +and #size-cells are not inherited so every node with children must specify them. The kernel requires the root node to have those properties defining addresses format for devices directly mapped on the processor bus. @@ -1776,7 +1777,7 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model. Xilinx uartlite devices are simple fixed speed serial ports. - Requred properties: + Required properties: - current-speed : Baud rate of uartlite v) Xilinx hwicap @@ -1798,7 +1799,7 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model. Xilinx UART 16550 devices are very similar to the NS16550 but with different register spacing and an offset from the base address. - Requred properties: + Required properties: - clock-frequency : Frequency of the clock input - reg-offset : A value of 3 is required - reg-shift : A value of 2 is required @@ -1883,6 +1884,62 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model. &qe_pio_c 6>; }; + s) SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) busses + + SPI busses can be described with a node for the SPI master device + and a set of child nodes for each SPI slave on the bus. For this + discussion, it is assumed that the system's SPI controller is in + SPI master mode. This binding does not describe SPI controllers + in slave mode. + + The SPI master node requires the following properties: + - #address-cells - number of cells required to define a chip select + address on the SPI bus. + - #size-cells - should be zero. + - compatible - name of SPI bus controller following generic names + recommended practice. + No other properties are required in the SPI bus node. It is assumed + that a driver for an SPI bus device will understand that it is an SPI bus. + However, the binding does not attempt to define the specific method for + assigning chip select numbers. Since SPI chip select configuration is + flexible and non-standardized, it is left out of this binding with the + assumption that board specific platform code will be used to manage + chip selects. Individual drivers can define additional properties to + support describing the chip select layout. + + SPI slave nodes must be children of the SPI master node and can + contain the following properties. + - reg - (required) chip select address of device. + - compatible - (required) name of SPI device following generic names + recommended practice + - spi-max-frequency - (required) Maximum SPI clocking speed of device in Hz + - spi-cpol - (optional) Empty property indicating device requires + inverse clock polarity (CPOL) mode + - spi-cpha - (optional) Empty property indicating device requires + shifted clock phase (CPHA) mode + + SPI example for an MPC5200 SPI bus: + spi@f00 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + compatible = "fsl,mpc5200b-spi","fsl,mpc5200-spi"; + reg = <0xf00 0x20>; + interrupts = <2 13 0 2 14 0>; + interrupt-parent = <&mpc5200_pic>; + + ethernet-switch@0 { + compatible = "micrel,ks8995m"; + spi-max-frequency = <1000000>; + reg = <0>; + }; + + codec@1 { + compatible = "ti,tlv320aic26"; + spi-max-frequency = <100000>; + reg = <1>; + }; + }; + VII - Marvell Discovery mv64[345]6x System Controller chips =========================================================== @@ -1896,7 +1953,7 @@ prefixed with the string "marvell,", for Marvell Technology Group Ltd. 1) The /system-controller node This node is used to represent the system-controller and must be - present when the system uses a system contller chip. The top-level + present when the system uses a system controller chip. The top-level system-controller node contains information that is global to all devices within the system controller chip. The node name begins with "system-controller" followed by the unit address, which is diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt index b35f3482e3e..2ea76d9d137 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/serial.txt @@ -7,6 +7,15 @@ Currently defined compatibles: - fsl,cpm2-scc-uart - fsl,qe-uart +Modem control lines connected to GPIO controllers are listed in the gpios +property as described in booting-without-of.txt, section IX.1 in the following +order: + +CTS, RTS, DCD, DSR, DTR, and RI. + +The gpios property is optional and can be left out when control lines are +not used. + Example: serial@11a00 { @@ -18,4 +27,6 @@ Example: interrupt-parent = <&PIC>; fsl,cpm-brg = <1>; fsl,cpm-command = <00800000>; + gpios = <&gpio_c 15 0 + &gpio_d 29 0>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt index df7afe43d46..9d4e33df624 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/eeh-pci-error-recovery.txt @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ error. Given an arbitrary address, the routine pci_get_device_by_addr() will find the pci device associated with that address (if any). -The default include/asm-powerpc/io.h macros readb(), inb(), insb(), +The default arch/powerpc/include/asm/io.h macros readb(), inb(), insb(), etc. include a check to see if the i/o read returned all-0xff's. If so, these make a call to eeh_dn_check_failure(), which in turn asks the firmware if the all-ff's value is the sign of a true EEH diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt index 896266432d3..06da4d4b44f 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Although it is not recommended, you can specify '0' in the soc.model field to skip matching SOCs altogether. The 'model' field is a 16-bit number that matches the actual SOC. The -'major' and 'minor' fields are the major and minor revision numbrs, +'major' and 'minor' fields are the major and minor revision numbers, respectively, of the SOC. For example, to match the 8323, revision 1.0: diff --git a/Documentation/rfkill.txt b/Documentation/rfkill.txt index 0843ed0163a..6fcb3060dec 100644 --- a/Documentation/rfkill.txt +++ b/Documentation/rfkill.txt @@ -363,6 +363,11 @@ This rule exists because users of the rfkill subsystem expect to get (and set, when possible) the overall transmitter rfkill state, not of a particular rfkill line. +5. During suspend, the rfkill class will attempt to soft-block the radio +through a call to rfkill->toggle_radio, and will try to restore its previous +state during resume. After a rfkill class is suspended, it will *not* call +rfkill->toggle_radio until it is resumed. + Example of a WLAN wireless driver connected to the rfkill subsystem: -------------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -390,9 +395,10 @@ rfkill lines are inactive, it must return RFKILL_STATE_SOFT_BLOCKED if its soft rfkill input line is active. Only if none of the rfkill input lines are active, will it return RFKILL_STATE_UNBLOCKED. -If it doesn't implement the get_state() hook, it must make sure that its calls -to rfkill_force_state() are enough to keep the status always up-to-date, and it -must do a rfkill_force_state() on resume from sleep. +Since the device has a hardware rfkill line, it IS subject to state changes +external to rfkill. Therefore, the driver must make sure that it calls +rfkill_force_state() to keep the status always up-to-date, and it must do a +rfkill_force_state() on resume from sleep. Every time the driver gets a notification from the card that one of its rfkill lines changed state (polling might be needed on badly designed cards that don't @@ -422,13 +428,24 @@ of the hardware is unknown), or read-write (where the hardware can be queried about its current state). The rfkill class will call the get_state hook of a device every time it needs -to know the *real* current state of the hardware. This can happen often. +to know the *real* current state of the hardware. This can happen often, but +it does not do any polling, so it is not enough on hardware that is subject +to state changes outside of the rfkill subsystem. + +Therefore, calling rfkill_force_state() when a state change happens is +mandatory when the device has a hardware rfkill line, or when something else +like the firmware could cause its state to be changed without going through the +rfkill class. Some hardware provides events when its status changes. In these cases, it is best for the driver to not provide a get_state hook, and instead register the rfkill class *already* with the correct status, and keep it updated using rfkill_force_state() when it gets an event from the hardware. +rfkill_force_state() must be used on the device resume handlers to update the +rfkill status, should there be any chance of the device status changing during +the sleep. + There is no provision for a statically-allocated rfkill struct. You must use rfkill_allocate() to allocate one. diff --git a/Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt b/Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt index e938c442277..bde473df748 100644 --- a/Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt +++ b/Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ device 4711 via subchannel 1 in subchannel set 0, and subchannel 2 is a non-I/O subchannel. Device 1234 is accessed via subchannel 0 in subchannel set 1. The subchannel named 'defunct' does not represent any real subchannel on the -system; it is a pseudo subchannel where disconnnected ccw devices are moved to +system; it is a pseudo subchannel where disconnected ccw devices are moved to if they are displaced by another ccw device becoming operational on their former subchannel. The ccw devices will be moved again to a proper subchannel if they become operational again on that subchannel. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas index 716fcc1cafb..c851ef49779 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas @@ -1,3 +1,26 @@ + +1 Release Date : Thur.July. 24 11:41:51 PST 2008 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Sumant Patro + Bo Yang + +2 Current Version : 00.00.04.01 +3 Older Version : 00.00.03.22 + +1. Add the new controller (0078, 0079) support to the driver + Those controllers are LSI's next generatation(gen2) SAS controllers. + +1 Release Date : Mon.June. 23 10:12:45 PST 2008 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Sumant Patro + Bo Yang + +2 Current Version : 00.00.03.22 +3 Older Version : 00.00.03.20 + +1. Add shutdown DCMD cmd to the shutdown routine to make FW shutdown proper. +2. Unexpected interrupt occurs in HWR Linux driver, add the dumy readl pci flush will fix this issue. + 1 Release Date : Mon. March 10 11:02:31 PDT 2008 - (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) Sumant Patro diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt b/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt index a810421f1fb..3920f28710c 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt @@ -524,7 +524,7 @@ - Michael Lang June 25 1997: (v1.8b) - 1) Some cosmetical changes for the handling of SCSI-device-types. + 1) Some cosmetic changes for the handling of SCSI-device-types. Now, also CD-Burners / WORMs and SCSI-scanners should work. For MO-drives I have no experience, therefore not yet supported. In logical_devices I changed from different type-variables to one @@ -914,7 +914,7 @@ in version 4.0. This was never really necessary, as all troubles were based on non-command related reasons up to now, so bypassing commands did not help to avoid any bugs. It is kept in 3.2X for debugging reasons. - 5) Dynamical reassignment of ldns was again verified and analyzed to be + 5) Dynamic reassignment of ldns was again verified and analyzed to be completely inoperational. This is corrected and should work now. 6) All commands that get sent to the SCSI adapter were verified and completed in such a way, that they are now completely conform to the @@ -1386,7 +1386,7 @@ concerning the Linux-kernel in special, this SCSI-driver comes without any warranty. Its functionality is tested as good as possible on certain machines and combinations of computer hardware, which does not exclude, - that dataloss or severe damage of hardware is possible while using this + that data loss or severe damage of hardware is possible while using this part of software on some arbitrary computer hardware or in combination with other software packages. It is highly recommended to make backup copies of your data before using this software. Furthermore, personal diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/lpfc.txt b/Documentation/scsi/lpfc.txt index 4dbe41370a6..5741ea8aa88 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/lpfc.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/lpfc.txt @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ Cable pull and temporary device Loss: being removed, a switch rebooting, or a device reboot), the driver could hide the disappearance of the device from the midlayer. I/O's issued to the LLDD would simply be queued for a short duration, allowing the device - to reappear or link come back alive, with no inadvertant side effects + to reappear or link come back alive, with no inadvertent side effects to the system. If the driver did not hide these conditions, i/o would be errored by the driver, the mid-layer would exhaust its retries, and the device would be taken offline. Manual intervention would be required to diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt index d403e46d846..75143f0c23b 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Overview: discussion will concentrate on NPIV. Note: World Wide Name assignment (and uniqueness guarantees) are left - up to an administrative entity controling the vport. For example, + up to an administrative entity controlling the vport. For example, if vports are to be associated with virtual machines, a XEN mgmt utility would be responsible for creating wwpn/wwnn's for the vport, using it's own naming authority and OUI. (Note: it already does this @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Device Trees and Vport Objects: Here's what to expect in the device tree : The typical Physical Port's Scsi_Host: /sys/devices/.../host17/ - and it has the typical decendent tree: + and it has the typical descendant tree: /sys/devices/.../host17/rport-17:0-0/target17:0:0/17:0:0:0: and then the vport is created on the Physical Port: /sys/devices/.../host17/vport-17:0-0 @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Vport States: independent of the adapter's link state. - Instantiation of the vport on the FC link via ELS traffic, etc. This is equivalent to a "link up" and successfull link initialization. - Futher information can be found in the interfaces section below for + Further information can be found in the interfaces section below for Vport Creation. Once a vport has been instantiated with the kernel/LLDD, a vport state diff --git a/Documentation/sh/clk.txt b/Documentation/sh/clk.txt index 9aef710e9a4..114b595cfa9 100644 --- a/Documentation/sh/clk.txt +++ b/Documentation/sh/clk.txt @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ means no changes to adjanced clock Internally, the clk_set_rate_ex forwards request to clk->ops->set_rate method, if it is present in ops structure. The method should set the clock rate and adjust all needed clocks according to the passed algo_id. -Exact values for algo_id are machine-dependend. For the sh7722, the following +Exact values for algo_id are machine-dependent. For the sh7722, the following values are defined: NO_CHANGE = 0, diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 72aff61e731..b117e42a616 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -1024,6 +1024,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. intel-mac-v3 Intel Mac Type 3 intel-mac-v4 Intel Mac Type 4 intel-mac-v5 Intel Mac Type 5 + intel-mac-auto Intel Mac (detect type according to subsystem id) macmini Intel Mac Mini (equivalent with type 3) macbook Intel Mac Book (eq. type 5) macbook-pro-v1 Intel Mac Book Pro 1st generation (eq. type 3) @@ -1143,8 +1144,6 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. This module supports autoprobe and multiple cards. - Power management is _not_ supported. - Module snd-ice1712 ------------------ @@ -1627,8 +1626,6 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. This module supports autoprobe and multiple cards. - Power management is _not_ supported. - Module snd-pcsp ----------------- @@ -2080,13 +2077,11 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. Module snd-virtuoso ------------------- - Module for sound cards based on the Asus AV200 chip, i.e., - Xonar D2 and Xonar D2X. + Module for sound cards based on the Asus AV100/AV200 chips, + i.e., Xonar D1, DX, D2 and D2X. This module supports autoprobe and multiple cards. - Power management is _not_ supported. - Module snd-vx222 ---------------- diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt index 2ad5e6306c4..a4c53d8961e 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt @@ -236,15 +236,15 @@ The parameter can be given: alias snd-card-1 snd-usb-audio options snd-usb-audio index=1 device_setup=0x09 -CAUTION when initializaing the device +CAUTION when initializing the device ------------------------------------- * Correct initialization on the device requires that device_setup is given to the module BEFORE the device is turned on. So, if you use the "manual probing" method described above, take care to power-on the device AFTER this initialization. - * Failing to respect this will lead in a misconfiguration of the device. In this case - turn off the device, unproble the snd-usb-audio module, then probe it again with + * Failing to respect this will lead to a misconfiguration of the device. In this case + turn off the device, unprobe the snd-usb-audio module, then probe it again with correct device_setup parameter and then (and only then) turn on the device again. * If you've correctly initialized the device in a valid mode and then want to switch @@ -388,9 +388,9 @@ There are 2 main potential issues when using Jackd with the device: Jack supports big endian devices only in recent versions (thanks to Andreas Steinmetz for his first big-endian patch). I can't remember -extacly when this support was released into jackd, let's just say that +exactly when this support was released into jackd, let's just say that with jackd version 0.103.0 it's almost ok (just a small bug is affecting -16bits Big-Endian devices, but since you've read carefully the above +16bits Big-Endian devices, but since you've read carefully the above paragraphs, you're now using kernel >= 2.6.23 and your 16bits devices are now Little Endians ;-) ). diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/hda_codec.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/hda_codec.txt index 8e1b0252669..34e87ec1379 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/hda_codec.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/hda_codec.txt @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ CONFIG_SND_HDA_POWER_SAVE kconfig. It's called when the codec needs to power up or may power down. The controller should check the all belonging codecs on the bus whether they are actually powered off (check codec->power_on), and optionally the driver may power down the -contoller side, too. +controller side, too. The bus instance is created via snd_hda_bus_new(). You need to pass the card instance, the template, and the pointer to store the diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt index c784a18b94d..b2ed6983f40 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Audio DAPM widgets fall into a number of types:- (Widgets are defined in include/sound/soc-dapm.h) Widgets are usually added in the codec driver and the machine driver. There are -convience macros defined in soc-dapm.h that can be used to quickly build a +convenience macros defined in soc-dapm.h that can be used to quickly build a list of widgets of the codecs and machines DAPM widgets. Most widgets have a name, register, shift and invert. Some widgets have extra diff --git a/Documentation/sparse.txt b/Documentation/sparse.txt index 1a3bdc27d95..42f43fa59f2 100644 --- a/Documentation/sparse.txt +++ b/Documentation/sparse.txt @@ -73,10 +73,10 @@ recompiled, or use "make C=2" to run sparse on the files whether they need to be recompiled or not. The latter is a fast way to check the whole tree if you have already built it. -The optional make variable CHECKFLAGS can be used to pass arguments to sparse. -The build system passes -Wbitwise to sparse automatically. To perform -endianness checks, you may define __CHECK_ENDIAN__: +The optional make variable CF can be used to pass arguments to sparse. The +build system passes -Wbitwise to sparse automatically. To perform endianness +checks, you may define __CHECK_ENDIAN__: - make C=2 CHECKFLAGS="-D__CHECK_ENDIAN__" + make C=2 CF="-D__CHECK_ENDIAN__" These checks are disabled by default as they generate a host of warnings. diff --git a/Documentation/spi/Makefile b/Documentation/spi/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a5b03c88bea --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/spi/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built. +obj- := dummy.o + +# List of programs to build +hostprogs-y := spidev_test spidev_fdx + +# Tell kbuild to always build the programs +always := $(hostprogs-y) + +HOSTCFLAGS_spidev_test.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include +HOSTCFLAGS_spidev_fdx.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include diff --git a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx index f3853cc37bd..bbe8dee681a 100644 --- a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx +++ b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Declaring PXA2xx Master Controllers ----------------------------------- Typically a SPI master is defined in the arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c as a "platform device". The master configuration is passed to the driver via a table -found in include/asm-arm/arch-pxa/pxa2xx_spi.h: +found in arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/pxa2xx_spi.h: struct pxa2xx_spi_master { enum pxa_ssp_type ssp_type; @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ using the "spi_board_info" structure found in "linux/spi/spi.h". See Each slave device attached to the PXA must provide slave specific configuration information via the structure "pxa2xx_spi_chip" found in -"include/asm-arm/arch-pxa/pxa2xx_spi.h". The pxa2xx_spi master controller driver +"arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/pxa2xx_spi.h". The pxa2xx_spi master controller driver will uses the configuration whenever the driver communicates with the slave device. diff --git a/Documentation/spi/spi-summary b/Documentation/spi/spi-summary index 6d5f18143c5..8bae2f018d3 100644 --- a/Documentation/spi/spi-summary +++ b/Documentation/spi/spi-summary @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ board should normally be set up and registered. So for example arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c files might have code like: - #include <asm/arch/spi.h> /* for mysoc_spi_data */ + #include <mach/spi.h> /* for mysoc_spi_data */ /* if your mach-* infrastructure doesn't support kernels that can * run on multiple boards, pdata wouldn't benefit from "__init". @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ So for example arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c files might have code like: And SOC-specific utility code might look something like: - #include <asm/arch/spi.h> + #include <mach/spi.h> static struct platform_device spi2 = { ... }; diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt index 8a4863c4edd..d79eeda7a69 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ of kilobytes free. The VM uses this number to compute a pages_min value for each lowmem zone in the system. Each lowmem zone gets a number of reserved free pages based proportionally on its size. -Some minimal ammount of memory is needed to satisfy PF_MEMALLOC +Some minimal amount of memory is needed to satisfy PF_MEMALLOC allocations; if you set this to lower than 1024KB, your system will become subtly broken, and prone to deadlock under high loads. diff --git a/Documentation/timers/highres.txt b/Documentation/timers/highres.txt index a73ecf5b4bd..21332233cef 100644 --- a/Documentation/timers/highres.txt +++ b/Documentation/timers/highres.txt @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ increase of flexibility and the avoidance of duplicated code across architectures justifies the slight increase of the binary size. The conversion of an architecture has no functional impact, but allows to -utilize the high resolution and dynamic tick functionalites without any change +utilize the high resolution and dynamic tick functionalities without any change to the clock event device and timer interrupt code. After the conversion the enabling of high resolution timers and dynamic ticks is simply provided by adding the kernel/time/Kconfig file to the architecture specific Kconfig and diff --git a/Documentation/unaligned-memory-access.txt b/Documentation/unaligned-memory-access.txt index b0472ac5226..f866c72291b 100644 --- a/Documentation/unaligned-memory-access.txt +++ b/Documentation/unaligned-memory-access.txt @@ -218,9 +218,35 @@ If use of such macros is not convenient, another option is to use memcpy(), where the source or destination (or both) are of type u8* or unsigned char*. Due to the byte-wise nature of this operation, unaligned accesses are avoided. + +Alignment vs. Networking +======================== + +On architectures that require aligned loads, networking requires that the IP +header is aligned on a four-byte boundary to optimise the IP stack. For +regular ethernet hardware, the constant NET_IP_ALIGN is used. On most +architectures this constant has the value 2 because the normal ethernet +header is 14 bytes long, so in order to get proper alignment one needs to +DMA to an address which can be expressed as 4*n + 2. One notable exception +here is powerpc which defines NET_IP_ALIGN to 0 because DMA to unaligned +addresses can be very expensive and dwarf the cost of unaligned loads. + +For some ethernet hardware that cannot DMA to unaligned addresses like +4*n+2 or non-ethernet hardware, this can be a problem, and it is then +required to copy the incoming frame into an aligned buffer. Because this is +unnecessary on architectures that can do unaligned accesses, the code can be +made dependent on CONFIG_HAVE_EFFICIENT_UNALIGNED_ACCESS like so: + +#ifdef CONFIG_HAVE_EFFICIENT_UNALIGNED_ACCESS + skb = original skb +#else + skb = copy skb +#endif + -- -Author: Daniel Drake <dsd@gentoo.org> +Authors: Daniel Drake <dsd@gentoo.org>, + Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> With help from: Alan Cox, Avuton Olrich, Heikki Orsila, Jan Engelhardt, -Johannes Berg, Kyle McMartin, Kyle Moffett, Randy Dunlap, Robert Hancock, -Uli Kunitz, Vadim Lobanov +Kyle McMartin, Kyle Moffett, Randy Dunlap, Robert Hancock, Uli Kunitz, +Vadim Lobanov diff --git a/Documentation/usb/auerswald.txt b/Documentation/usb/auerswald.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 7ee4d8f6911..00000000000 --- a/Documentation/usb/auerswald.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ - Auerswald USB kernel driver - =========================== - -What is it? What can I do with it? -================================== -The auerswald USB kernel driver connects your linux 2.4.x -system to the auerswald usb-enabled devices. - -There are two types of auerswald usb devices: -a) small PBX systems (ISDN) -b) COMfort system telephones (ISDN) - -The driver installation creates the devices -/dev/usb/auer0..15. These devices carry a vendor- -specific protocol. You may run all auerswald java -software on it. The java software needs a native -library "libAuerUsbJNINative.so" installed on -your system. This library is available from -auerswald and shipped as part of the java software. - -You may create the devices with: - mknod -m 666 /dev/usb/auer0 c 180 112 - ... - mknod -m 666 /dev/usb/auer15 c 180 127 - -Future plans -============ -- Connection to ISDN4LINUX (the hisax interface) - -The maintainer of this driver is wolfgang@iksw-muees.de diff --git a/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt b/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt index 2af40060949..381b22ee783 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ not) in a system. This feature will allow you to implement a lock-down of USB devices, fully controlled by user space. As of now, when a USB device is connected it is configured and -it's interfaces inmediately made available to the users. With this +its interfaces are immediately made available to the users. With this modification, only if root authorizes the device to be configured will then it be possible to use it. diff --git a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt index b2fc4d4a991..9d31140e3f5 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt @@ -436,7 +436,12 @@ post_reset; the USB core guarantees that this is true of internal suspend/resume events as well. If a driver wants to block all suspend/resume calls during some -critical section, it can simply acquire udev->pm_mutex. +critical section, it can simply acquire udev->pm_mutex. Note that +calls to resume may be triggered indirectly. Block IO due to memory +allocations can make the vm subsystem resume a device. Thus while +holding this lock you must not allocate memory with GFP_KERNEL or +GFP_NOFS. + Alternatively, if the critical section might call some of the usb_autopm_* routines, the driver can avoid deadlock by doing: diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828 index 86d1c8e7b18..aa05e5bb22f 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.au0828 @@ -2,3 +2,5 @@ 1 -> Hauppauge HVR950Q (au0828) [2040:7200,2040:7210,2040:7217,2040:721b,2040:721f,2040:7280,0fd9:0008] 2 -> Hauppauge HVR850 (au0828) [2040:7240] 3 -> DViCO FusionHDTV USB (au0828) [0fe9:d620] + 4 -> Hauppauge HVR950Q rev xxF8 (au0828) [2040:7201,2040:7211,2040:7281] + 5 -> Hauppauge Woodbury (au0828) [2040:8200] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx index 10591467ef1..89c7f32abf9 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@ 0 -> Unknown EM2800 video grabber (em2800) [eb1a:2800] - 1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2750,eb1a:2820,eb1a:2821,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883] + 1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2820,eb1a:2821,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883] 2 -> Terratec Cinergy 250 USB (em2820/em2840) [0ccd:0036] 3 -> Pinnacle PCTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2304:0208] 4 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2040:4200,2040:4201] 5 -> MSI VOX USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840) 6 -> Terratec Cinergy 200 USB (em2800) - 7 -> Leadtek Winfast USB II (em2800) + 7 -> Leadtek Winfast USB II (em2800) [0413:6023] 8 -> Kworld USB2800 (em2800) 9 -> Pinnacle Dazzle DVC 90/DVC 100 (em2820/em2840) [2304:0207,2304:021a] 10 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 900 (em2880) [2040:6500] @@ -14,7 +14,46 @@ 13 -> Terratec Prodigy XS (em2880) [0ccd:0047] 14 -> Pixelview Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840) 15 -> V-Gear PocketTV (em2800) - 16 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 950 (em2880) [2040:6513,2040:6517,2040:651b,2040:651f] + 16 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 950 (em2883) [2040:6513,2040:6517,2040:651b,2040:651f] 17 -> Pinnacle PCTV HD Pro Stick (em2880) [2304:0227] 18 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 900 (R2) (em2880) [2040:6502] 19 -> PointNix Intra-Oral Camera (em2860) + 20 -> AMD ATI TV Wonder HD 600 (em2880) [0438:b002] + 21 -> eMPIA Technology, Inc. GrabBeeX+ Video Encoder (em2800) [eb1a:2801] + 22 -> Unknown EM2750/EM2751 webcam grabber (em2750) [eb1a:2750,eb1a:2751] + 23 -> Huaqi DLCW-130 (em2750) + 24 -> D-Link DUB-T210 TV Tuner (em2820/em2840) [2001:f112] + 25 -> Gadmei UTV310 (em2820/em2840) + 26 -> Hercules Smart TV USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840) + 27 -> Pinnacle PCTV USB 2 (Philips FM1216ME) (em2820/em2840) + 28 -> Leadtek Winfast USB II Deluxe (em2820/em2840) + 29 -> Pinnacle Dazzle DVC 100 (em2820/em2840) + 30 -> Videology 20K14XUSB USB2.0 (em2820/em2840) + 31 -> Usbgear VD204v9 (em2821) + 32 -> Supercomp USB 2.0 TV (em2821) + 33 -> SIIG AVTuner-PVR/Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0 (em2821) + 34 -> Terratec Cinergy A Hybrid XS (em2860) [0ccd:004f] + 35 -> Typhoon DVD Maker (em2860) + 36 -> NetGMBH Cam (em2860) + 37 -> Gadmei UTV330 (em2860) + 38 -> Yakumo MovieMixer (em2861) + 39 -> KWorld PVRTV 300U (em2861) [eb1a:e300] + 40 -> Plextor ConvertX PX-TV100U (em2861) [093b:a005] + 41 -> Kworld 350 U DVB-T (em2870) [eb1a:e350] + 42 -> Kworld 355 U DVB-T (em2870) [eb1a:e355,eb1a:e357] + 43 -> Terratec Cinergy T XS (em2870) [0ccd:0043] + 44 -> Terratec Cinergy T XS (MT2060) (em2870) + 45 -> Pinnacle PCTV DVB-T (em2870) + 46 -> Compro, VideoMate U3 (em2870) [185b:2870] + 47 -> KWorld DVB-T 305U (em2880) [eb1a:e305] + 48 -> KWorld DVB-T 310U (em2880) + 49 -> MSI DigiVox A/D (em2880) [eb1a:e310] + 50 -> MSI DigiVox A/D II (em2880) [eb1a:e320] + 51 -> Terratec Hybrid XS Secam (em2880) [0ccd:004c] + 52 -> DNT DA2 Hybrid (em2881) + 53 -> Pinnacle Hybrid Pro (em2881) + 54 -> Kworld VS-DVB-T 323UR (em2882) [eb1a:e323] + 55 -> Terratec Hybrid XS (em2882) (em2882) [0ccd:005e] + 56 -> Pinnacle Hybrid Pro (2) (em2882) [2304:0226] + 57 -> Kworld PlusTV HD Hybrid 330 (em2883) [eb1a:a316] + 58 -> Compro VideoMate ForYou/Stereo (em2820/em2840) [185b:2041] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/Makefile b/Documentation/video4linux/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..1ed0e98d057 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built. +obj- := dummy.o + +# List of programs to build +hostprogs-y := v4lgrab + +# Tell kbuild to always build the programs +always := $(hostprogs-y) diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 0c4880af57a..0f03900c48f 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -List of the webcams know by gspca. +List of the webcams known by gspca. The modules are: gspca_main main driver @@ -88,14 +88,14 @@ zc3xx 0471:0325 Philips SPC 200 NC zc3xx 0471:0326 Philips SPC 300 NC sonixj 0471:0327 Philips SPC 600 NC sonixj 0471:0328 Philips SPC 700 NC -zc3xx 0471:032d Philips spc210nc -zc3xx 0471:032e Philips spc315nc -sonixj 0471:0330 Philips SPC 710NC +zc3xx 0471:032d Philips SPC 210 NC +zc3xx 0471:032e Philips SPC 315 NC +sonixj 0471:0330 Philips SPC 710 NC spca501 0497:c001 Smile International sunplus 04a5:3003 Benq DC 1300 sunplus 04a5:3008 Benq DC 1500 -sunplus 04a5:300a Benq DC3410 -spca500 04a5:300c Benq DC1016 +sunplus 04a5:300a Benq DC 3410 +spca500 04a5:300c Benq DC 1016 sunplus 04f1:1001 JVC GC A50 spca561 04fc:0561 Flexcam 100 sunplus 04fc:500c Sunplus CA500C @@ -175,19 +175,21 @@ sunplus 08ca:2060 Aiptek PocketDV5300 tv8532 0923:010f ICM532 cams mars 093a:050f Mars-Semi Pc-Camera pac207 093a:2460 PAC207 Qtec Webcam 100 -pac207 093a:2463 Philips spc200nc pac207 +pac207 093a:2463 Philips SPC 220 NC pac207 093a:2464 Labtec Webcam 1200 pac207 093a:2468 PAC207 pac207 093a:2470 Genius GF112 -pac207 093a:2471 PAC207 Genius VideoCam ge111 -pac207 093a:2472 PAC207 Genius VideoCam ge110 +pac207 093a:2471 Genius VideoCam ge111 +pac207 093a:2472 Genius VideoCam ge110 pac7311 093a:2600 PAC7311 Typhoon -pac7311 093a:2601 PAC7311 Phillips SPC610NC +pac7311 093a:2601 Philips SPC 610 NC pac7311 093a:2603 PAC7312 -pac7311 093a:2608 PAC7311 Trust WB-3300p -pac7311 093a:260e PAC7311 Gigaware VGA PC Camera, Trust WB-3350p, SIGMA cam 2350 -pac7311 093a:260f PAC7311 SnakeCam +pac7311 093a:2608 Trust WB-3300p +pac7311 093a:260e Gigaware VGA PC Camera, Trust WB-3350p, SIGMA cam 2350 +pac7311 093a:260f SnakeCam pac7311 093a:2621 PAC731x +pac7311 093a:2624 PAC7302 +pac7311 093a:2626 Labtec 2200 zc3xx 0ac8:0302 Z-star Vimicro zc0302 vc032x 0ac8:0321 Vimicro generic vc0321 vc032x 0ac8:0323 Vimicro Vc0323 @@ -220,12 +222,14 @@ sonixj 0c45:60c0 Sangha Sn535 sonixj 0c45:60ec SN9C105+MO4000 sonixj 0c45:60fb Surfer NoName sonixj 0c45:60fc LG-LIC300 +sonixj 0c45:6128 Microdia/Sonix SNP325 sonixj 0c45:612a Avant Camera sonixj 0c45:612c Typhoon Rasy Cam 1.3MPix sonixj 0c45:6130 Sonix Pccam sonixj 0c45:6138 Sn9c120 Mo4000 sonixj 0c45:613b Surfer SN-206 sonixj 0c45:613c Sonix Pccam168 +sonixj 0c45:6143 Sonix Pccam168 sunplus 0d64:0303 Sunplus FashionCam DXG etoms 102c:6151 Qcam Sangha CIF etoms 102c:6251 Qcam xxxxxx VGA @@ -233,7 +237,7 @@ zc3xx 10fd:0128 Typhoon Webshot II USB 300k 0x0128 spca561 10fd:7e50 FlyCam Usb 100 zc3xx 10fd:8050 Typhoon Webshot II USB 300k spca501 1776:501c Arowana 300K CMOS Camera -t613 17a1:0128 T613/TAS5130A +t613 17a1:0128 TASCORP JPEG Webcam, NGS Cyclops vc032x 17ef:4802 Lenovo Vc0323+MI1310_SOC pac207 2001:f115 D-Link DSB-C120 spca500 2899:012c Toptro Industrial diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt index b26f5195af5..73de4050d63 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Loading can be done as shown below: [root@localhost home]# modprobe sn9c102 -Note that the module is called "sn9c102" for historic reasons, althought it +Note that the module is called "sn9c102" for historic reasons, although it does not just support the SN9C102. At this point all the devices supported by the driver and connected to the USB diff --git a/Documentation/vm/Makefile b/Documentation/vm/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6f562f778b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/vm/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built. +obj- := dummy.o + +# List of programs to build +hostprogs-y := slabinfo + +# Tell kbuild to always build the programs +always := $(hostprogs-y) diff --git a/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt b/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt index 3102b81bef8..ea8714fcc3a 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ memory that is preset in system at this time. System administrators may want to put this command in one of the local rc init files. This will enable the kernel to request huge pages early in the boot process (when the possibility of getting physical contiguous pages is still very high). In either -case, adminstrators will want to verify the number of hugepages actually +case, administrators will want to verify the number of hugepages actually allocated by checking the sysctl or meminfo. /proc/sys/vm/nr_overcommit_hugepages indicates how large the pool of @@ -95,6 +95,29 @@ this condition holds, however, no more surplus huge pages will be allowed on the system until one of the two sysctls are increased sufficiently, or the surplus huge pages go out of use and are freed. +With support for multiple hugepage pools at run-time available, much of +the hugepage userspace interface has been duplicated in sysfs. The above +information applies to the default hugepage size (which will be +controlled by the proc interfaces for backwards compatibility). The root +hugepage control directory is + + /sys/kernel/mm/hugepages + +For each hugepage size supported by the running kernel, a subdirectory +will exist, of the form + + hugepages-${size}kB + +Inside each of these directories, the same set of files will exist: + + nr_hugepages + nr_overcommit_hugepages + free_hugepages + resv_hugepages + surplus_hugepages + +which function as described above for the default hugepage-sized case. + If the user applications are going to request hugepages using mmap system call, then it is required that system administrator mount a file system of type hugetlbfs: diff --git a/Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt b/Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt index bad16d3f6a4..6aaaeb38730 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ most general to most specific: the policy at the time they were allocated. VMA Policy: A "VMA" or "Virtual Memory Area" refers to a range of a task's - virtual adddress space. A task may define a specific policy for a range + virtual address space. A task may define a specific policy for a range of its virtual address space. See the MEMORY POLICIES APIS section, below, for an overview of the mbind() system call used to set a VMA policy. @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ follows: Because of this extra reference counting, and because we must lookup shared policies in a tree structure under spinlock, shared policies are - more expensive to use in the page allocation path. This is expecially + more expensive to use in the page allocation path. This is especially true for shared policies on shared memory regions shared by tasks running on different NUMA nodes. This extra overhead can be avoided by always falling back to task or system default policy for shared memory regions, diff --git a/Documentation/vm/page_migration b/Documentation/vm/page_migration index 99f89aa1016..d5fdfd34bba 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/page_migration +++ b/Documentation/vm/page_migration @@ -18,10 +18,11 @@ migrate_pages function call takes two sets of nodes and moves pages of a process that are located on the from nodes to the destination nodes. Page migration functions are provided by the numactl package by Andi Kleen (a version later than 0.9.3 is required. Get it from -ftp://ftp.suse.com/pub/people/ak). numactl provided libnuma which -provides an interface similar to other numa functionality for page migration. -cat /proc/<pid>/numa_maps allows an easy review of where the pages of -a process are located. See also the numa_maps manpage in the numactl package. +ftp://oss.sgi.com/www/projects/libnuma/download/). numactl provides libnuma +which provides an interface similar to other numa functionality for page +migration. cat /proc/<pid>/numa_maps allows an easy review of where the +pages of a process are located. See also the numa_maps documentation in the +proc(5) man page. Manual migration is useful if for example the scheduler has relocated a process to a processor on a distant node. A batch scheduler or an diff --git a/Documentation/volatile-considered-harmful.txt b/Documentation/volatile-considered-harmful.txt index 10c2e411cca..991c26a6ef6 100644 --- a/Documentation/volatile-considered-harmful.txt +++ b/Documentation/volatile-considered-harmful.txt @@ -114,6 +114,6 @@ CREDITS Original impetus and research by Randy Dunlap Written by Jonathan Corbet -Improvements via coments from Satyam Sharma, Johannes Stezenbach, Jesper +Improvements via comments from Satyam Sharma, Johannes Stezenbach, Jesper Juhl, Heikki Orsila, H. Peter Anvin, Philipp Hahn, and Stefan Richter. diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/src/Makefile b/Documentation/watchdog/src/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..40e5f46e474 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/watchdog/src/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built. +obj- := dummy.o + +# List of programs to build +hostprogs-y := watchdog-simple watchdog-test + +# Tell kbuild to always build the programs +always := $(hostprogs-y) |